Perdoceo Education

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549

FORM 10-K

(Mark One)
È ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(D) OF THE SECURITIES

EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2021
or

‘ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(D) OF THE SECURITIES

EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from

to
Commission File Number 0-23245

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

Delaware
(State of or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)

36-3932190
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification No.)

231 N. Martingale Road
Schaumburg, Illinois
(Address of principal executive offices)

60173
(zip code)
Registrant’s telephone number, including area code: (847) 781-3600
Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Title of each class

Trading symbol(s)

Name of each exchange on which registered

Common Stock, $0.01 par value

PRDO

Nasdaq Global Select Market

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act of

1933. Yes È No ‘

Indicate by check mark if the Registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934. Yes ‘ No È

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the Registrant was required to file
such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes È No ‘

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted

pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that
the registrant was required to submit such files). Yes È No ‘

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, smaller
reporting company, or an emerging growth company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” “smaller
reporting company” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.
È
Large accelerated filer
‘
Non-accelerated filer
Emerging growth company ‘

‘
Accelerated filer
Smaller reporting company ‘

If an emerging growth company, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period
for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ‘
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the
effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by
the registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. È

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant is a shell company, as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Securities Exchange Act of

1934. Yes ‘ No È

The aggregate market value of the Registrant’s voting common stock held by non-affiliates of the Registrant, based upon the
$12.27 per share closing sale price of the Registrant’s common stock on June 30, 2021 (the last business day of the Registrant’s most
recently completed second quarter), was approximately $720,000,000. For purposes of this calculation, the Registrant’s directors,
executive officers and 10% or greater stockholders have been assumed to be affiliates. This assumption of affiliate status is not
necessarily a conclusive determination for other purposes. As of February 18, 2022, the number of outstanding shares of Registrant’s
common stock was 68,748,662.

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE
Portions of the Registrant’s Notice of Annual Meeting and Proxy Statement for the Registrant’s 2022 Annual Meeting of

Stockholders are incorporated by reference into Part III of this Report.

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION

FORM 10-K

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART I
ITEM 1. BUSINESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 1A. RISK FACTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROPERTIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 2.
ITEM 3.
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PART II
ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER

MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 6. RESERVED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK . . . . . . .
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 8.
ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING

AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 9B. OTHER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 9C. DISCLOSURE REGARDING FOREIGN JURISDICTIONS THAT PREVENT

Page

1
31
44
44
45
45

46
48

49
67
67

67
67
68

INSPECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

69

PART III
ITEM 10. DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND

70
70

MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR

INDEPENDENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PART IV
ITEM 15. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ITEM 16. FORM 10-K SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX TO EXHIBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SIGNATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

71
71

72
72
73
77
78

Cautionary Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements

PART I

This Annual Report on Form 10-K contains “forward-looking statements,” as defined in Section 21E of the
Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, that reflect our current expectations regarding our future growth,
results of operations, cash flows, performance and business prospects and opportunities, as well as assumptions
made by, and information currently available to, our management. We have tried to identify forward-looking
statements by using words such as “anticipate,” “believe,” “expect,” “plan,” “seek,” “should,” ”will,”
“continue to,” “outlook,” “focused on” and similar expressions, but these words are not the exclusive means of
identifying forward-looking statements. These statements are based on information currently available to us and
are subject to various risks, uncertainties, and other factors, including, but not limited to, those matters
discussed herein under the caption “Risk Factors” that could cause our actual growth, results of operations,
financial condition, cash flows, performance, business prospects and opportunities to differ materially from those
expressed in, or implied by, these statements. Except as expressly required by the federal securities laws, we
undertake no obligation to update such factors or to publicly announce the results of any of the forward-looking
statements contained herein to reflect future events, developments, or changed circumstances or for any other
reason.

ITEM 1. BUSINESS

OVERVIEW

Perdoceo’s academic institutions offer a quality postsecondary education primarily online to a diverse
student population, along with campus-based and blended learning programs. Our accredited institutions –
Colorado Technical University (“CTU”) and the American InterContinental University System (“AIUS” or
“AIU System”) – provide degree programs from associate through doctoral level as well as non-degree
professional development and continuing education offerings. Our universities offer students industry-relevant
and career-focused academic programs that are designed to meet the educational needs of today’s busy adults.
CTU and AIUS continue to show innovation in higher education, advancing personalized learning technologies
like their intellipath® learning platform and using data analytics and technology to support students and enhance
learning. Perdoceo is committed to providing quality education that closes the gap between learners who seek to
advance their careers and employers needing a qualified workforce.

When used in this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the terms “we,” “us,” “our,” “the Company,” “Perdoceo”

and “PEC” refer to Perdoceo Education Corporation and our wholly-owned subsidiaries.

Our reporting segments correspond to our accredited institutions.

CTU

CTU is committed to providing quality and industry-relevant higher education to a diverse student
population through innovative technology and experienced faculty, enabling the pursuit of personal and
professional goals. CTU is focused on serving adult, non-traditional students seeking career advancement, as well
as addressing employer’s needs for a well-educated workforce. CTU offers academic programs in the career-
oriented disciplines of business and management, nursing, healthcare management, computer science,
engineering, information systems and technology, project management, cybersecurity and criminal justice.

CTU recently expanded its offerings in the areas of non-degree professional development and continuing
education programs through the acquisition of Hippo Education, LLC (“Hippo” and the “Hippo Acquisition”) on
September 10, 2021. Hippo provides continuing medical education and exam preparation for medical
professionals with a quality technology platform and strong course content. Hippo’s operations were brought
within the CTU segment, preserving the ‘Hippo Education’ name and programs as part of CTU’s operations.

1

Results of operations related to the Hippo acquisition are included in the consolidated financial statements from
the date of acquisition. See Note 3 “Business Acquisitions” in our consolidated financial statements for further
information.

Discussion of business operations, trends and key drivers of operating results will focus on CTU’s degree

programs, which represent a majority of CTU’s operations and the CTU segment. Specific references will be
made to Hippo when material to the disclosure or necessary to understand the overall discussion.

AIUS

AIUS is committed to providing quality and accessible higher education opportunities for a diverse student

population, including adult and other non-traditional learners and the military community. AIUS places emphasis
on the educational, professional and personal growth of each student. AIUS offers academic programs in the
career-oriented disciplines of business studies, information technologies, education, health sciences and criminal
justice.

On March 2, 2020, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of Trident University International
(“Trident University”), an accredited university offering online undergraduate, master’s and doctoral programs
with a strong focus on graduate programs. Trident University’s operations were brought within the AIUS
segment, preserving the “Trident” name and programs as part of American InterContinental University’s (“AIU”)
operations. Results of operations related to the acquisition of substantially all of the assets of Trident University
(the “Trident acquisition”) are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date of acquisition.

Following the Trident acquisition, AIUS implemented a university system model effective November 5,

2020. The American InterContinental University System is comprised of two universities: AIU and Trident
University International (“Trident” or “TUI”). The system structure provides a framework for AIU and Trident to
continue to serve their unique student populations while benefitting from one university system. Although both
universities operate under a shared governance structure and have a common mission, the system structure allows
each to retain its name and customize its programs and instructional and student service models to the needs of
its unique student populations.

AIUS recently expanded its non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings by

acquiring substantially all of the assets of DigitalCrafts (the “DigitalCrafts acquisition”) on August 2, 2021.
DigitalCrafts helps provide individuals an opportunity in the technology area through reskilling and upskilling
courses within the areas of web development, web design and cybersecurity. DigitalCrafts operations were
brought within the AIUS segment, preserving the ‘DigitalCrafts’ name and programs as part of AIUS’
operations. Results of operations related to the DigitalCrafts acquisition are included in the consolidated financial
statements from the date of acquisition. See Note 3 “Business Acquisitions” in our consolidated financial
statements for further information.

Discussion of business operations, trends and key drivers of operating results will focus on AIU, which

represents a majority of the AIU System and AIUS reporting segment. Specific references will be made to
Trident or DigitalCrafts when material to the disclosure or necessary to understand the overall discussion.

Student Enrollments Statistics

Total student enrollments as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 were approximately 40,400 students and

42,700 students, respectively, with approximately 96% enrolled in our institutions’ fully-online academic
programs for each year. Substantially all of the students attending our institutions reside within the United States
of America. Total student enrollments and student enrollment statistics presented below do not include learners

2

participating in non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings. Additional student
enrollment demographic information for our institutions as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 was as follows:

Student Enrollments by Age Group

As a Percentage of Total
Student Enrollments as of
December 31,

2021

2020

Over 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21 to 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Under 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

65%
32%
3%

62%
34%
4%

Student Enrollments by Core Curricula

As a Percentage of Total
Student Enrollments as of
December 31,

2021

2020

Business Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Health Education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

76%
11%
13%

76%
11%
13%

Student Enrollments by Degree Granting Program

As a Percentage of Total
Student Enrollments as of
December 31,

2021

2020

Doctoral and Master’s Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bachelor’s Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associate Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12%
66%
22%

13%
66%
21%

GUIDING PRINCIPLES AND STRATEGIC PRIORITIES

To compete successfully in today’s demanding economy, people benefit from higher education that provides

a foundation of knowledge and skills they can use in the workplace and to build meaningful careers. We aim to
become a leading provider of online postsecondary education to non-traditional students, including adult
learners. The core guiding principles we focus on in our pursuit of this goal are:

•

•

•

enhancing academic outcomes;

improving academic quality and integrity; and

complying with regulations.

Our strategic priorities that we believe will support our goal to become a leading provider of online
postsecondary education to non-traditional students and position the company for long-term sustainable and
responsible growth are:

•

•

•

enhance enrollment processes;

enhance student experiences and retention;

use technology as a differentiator;

3

•

•

leverage efficient and effective scalable shared services to support organic growth at our universities
and as a key enabler for inorganic growth strategies; and

invest in high value projects that support our operations.

OUR BUSINESS

Through our accredited academic institutions, we offer a quality postsecondary education primarily online
to a diverse student population, along with campus-based and blended learning programs. We pursue a student-
first mindset in our efforts to provide student support throughout the academic life cycle, from enrollment and
orientation through ongoing coaching and learning leading up to graduation, which we believe enhances overall
student learning experiences and academic outcomes. We are committed to investing in our academic institutions
and student support technology, which we believe enables our student support teams to provide customized
service that contributes to positive student experiences. Technology is a key enabler and differentiator for us and
we are continuing to expand the use of artificial intelligence and machine learning to additional areas of the
academic life cycle. We believe that our technology innovations provide students with tools that enable them to
focus on educational content in a manner that is best suited to their personal learning style.

Marketing, Student Recruitment and the Student Enrollment Process

Our universities seek motivated students with both the desire and ability to complete their academic
programs of choice. To promote interest among potential students, our universities develop and engage in a
variety of marketing activities which build awareness of our universities among prospective students. Our
marketing programs are designed to enhance each university’s opportunity to serve a targeted section of the
potential student population.

Perdoceo serves a diverse student population. Our students have a broad range of educational and
employment experiences which contributes to their college-level readiness. Each of our universities has an
admissions function responsible for interacting with prospective students interested in applying to an institution
after they have expressed interest in learning more about our academic institutions and programs. Generally, to
be qualified for admission to one of our universities, an applicant must have received a high school diploma or a
recognized equivalent, such as a General Education Development certificate. Some of our programs may also
require applicants to meet other program admissions requirements.

We use data analytics to help us identify and focus on prospective students who are more likely to succeed

at one of our universities. Our prospective student outreach process uses technology to provide a more
customized approach to enable us to more effectively provide prospective students with relevant information to
help them make more informed academic decisions.

One of our technology initiatives over the last few years to expand the use of artificial intelligence (“AI”)
and machine learning throughout the academic life cycle is AIU’s AI-based virtual assistant “chatbot” that we
named Lucy. Lucy has streamlined the process for prospective students who want to learn about our institution
and can address approximately 92% of their questions while continuing to learn from her interactions. If Lucy is
unable to address a question, the prospective student is referred to our admissions personnel for additional
assistance. Throughout 2021, we continued to expand the use of chatbots across different aspects of the academic
life cycle at both CTU and AIU.

Our technology enhancements enable our admissions staff to customize their prospective student outreach

and engagement strategies based on students’ prior educational experience, degree and areas of program interest,
thus providing a more meaningful and relevant interaction with the prospective student. We believe prospective
students have an improved overall experience in communications with our admissions personnel due to these
enhancements.

4

Admissions advisors serve as one of the prospective students’ primary contacts, providing information to
help them make informed enrollment decisions and assisting them with the completion of the enrollment process.
The admissions advisors also have a responsibility to provide guidance and support through the enrollment
application process and student orientation as well as assist each student as they transition into their first class.

Once a decision has been made to enroll at one of our academic institutions, the financial aid team works
with the prospective student, providing them with information about various loans and grants available to finance
their education. The focus is on getting these students financially prepared for school in a timely manner so that
they can focus on their academic activities.

Every enrolled student is offered an orientation that is designed to prepare them to begin classes at our
institutions. This orientation process also provides the opportunity for students to understand our academic and
support services. We believe completion of these activities better prepares a student to make an informed
decision about pursuing their education as well as to be more successful as it simulates their classroom
experience both online and in a campus-based environment. Completion of orientation does not financially
obligate students, nor does it require students to continue their education with the university.

Additionally, new students who attend online programs at our universities and do not want to continue have
21 days after the start of their program to notify the university of their intention to withdraw. Students who notify
and withdraw from the university within 21 days will not be responsible for any tuition-related expenses and are
refunded any amounts they have paid in tuition and other institutional fees.

Corporate Partnerships

Our universities have focused on expanding strategic relationships with corporate partners. During 2021,

CTU increased the size of its corporate partnership team during the first half of the year to further engage
prospective employers to leverage their tuition assistance programs and provide a debt-free education to their
employees. We expect these relationships to result in new student interest through increased awareness of our
institutions for the employees of our corporate partners. Corporate partnerships provide us with an opportunity to
connect with and educate a population of students we would otherwise not likely have access to. Students who
attend our institutions through corporate partnerships are awarded grants from the applicable university to
partially offset their tuition costs, the amount of which depends on the agreement with each respective corporate
partner. In addition, they typically receive some funding from their employer towards their tuition. Although the
amount paid by these students results in lower revenue per student due to the grants awarded from the applicable
university, the recruiting, marketing and support costs associated with these students are lower as well. Further,
these students are more likely to start class and tend to be more persistent in their pursuit of long-term learning,
which we believe will result in higher life-time value per student. As of December 31, 2021, approximately
19.1% and 4.8% of total student enrollments at CTU and AIUS, respectively, are a result of corporate partnership
agreements.

Student Retention and Academic Outcomes

Our institutions focus on improving student retention and enhancing academic outcomes. Investments in
student serving processes, including the use of technology, is a key focus to support these efforts. Our faculty and
student advisors provide frequent assistance and feedback to students during their course of academic study. We
support increased communication between our faculty and students by providing faculty with various technology
enablers such as a two-way messaging platform and enhanced data reporting and analytics to help them provide
meaningful academic support and information. As is the case at any postsecondary educational institution, a
portion of our students withdraw from their academic programs for a variety of academic, financial or personal
reasons, and these efforts are designed to help our students remain in school and succeed in their academic
program.

5

Our student advising model promotes collaboration between faculty and student advisors, which we believe

enhances effectiveness and provides students with consistent support and communication. Student advisors
continue to work with students throughout their academic program to provide relevant and specific feedback and
guidance as they progress through their classes. Additionally, a team of staff members from advising, admissions
and financial aid work directly with each new student creating a student-service atmosphere and encouraging
quality interactions.

Coupled with the student advising model, our academic institutions continually review course content,
pairing and sequencing to ensure workload levels build gradually as students develop skills and acclimate to
course expectations which we believe improves academic outcomes. Courses have been redesigned to
accommodate skill development holistically, which we believe will support progressive learning.

AIU’s student-centric framework focuses on having students interact with their admissions advisor from

enrollment through the end of their first academic session and be subsequently supported by faculty and student
advisors. We believe this structure improves overall student experiences and retention. This cross-functional
strategy is aimed at improving student engagement throughout the student’s academic life cycle, with particular
emphasis on the important onboarding phase and first academic term as the students adjust to their academic
program.

Trident’s flexible learning approach provides for more time between assignment due dates, which helps

students balance full-time academic progression with other priorities.

CTU leverages data analytics to provide proactive outreach and personalized advising to improve student
retention and academic outcomes. This approach is intended to help us reach the right student at the right time
with the right support, which we expect will increase learning and course completion by our students. We
continue to refine our data analytics process to enable our student advisors to be more effective in their student
engagement efforts.

Program Development

Our universities develop and deliver a variety of programs primarily resulting in the award of credentials

ranging from certificates to doctoral degrees in career-oriented programs of study in core curricula areas of
business studies, information technology and health education.

Our curricula, instructional delivery tools, and experienced faculty comprise the learning experience that
provides our student population with a unique opportunity to develop the knowledge, skills and competencies
required for specific careers. The curriculum development process focuses on desired career needs, while
considering relative competencies necessary to achieve these career needs, as well as any applicable
recommendations set forth by advisory boards, programmatic accrediting agencies and industry standards.
Subsequently, learning objectives are identified and courses are developed which foster student engagement in
activities and optimally result in the attainment of program learning outcomes.

During 2021, our institutions expanded their offerings with both the acquisition of and internal development
of non-degree professional development and continuing education programs. These online courses offer learning
opportunities where one can develop skills and knowledge in a specific endeavor or area of interest. Our
non-degree professional development and continuing education programs are designed to assist adult learners in
maintaining existing credentials and obtaining additional job-focused credentials and can help workers increase
skills and prepare for changes in the workplace.

Instructional Delivery

Our instructional delivery for our degree programs is based on the belief that learning depends on

instructional methodologies that facilitate student engagement with the instructor, with other students, and with

6

the course content. This engagement is fundamental to student learning outcomes, regardless of whether
instruction occurs within a physical or virtual classroom. We continue to focus on innovation in our delivery of
online education to enhance the learning experience for students.

During 2021, we began a multi-year project to enhance and upgrade our student technology infrastructure.
This includes several upgrades to our mobile platform and virtual campus and a redesign of our digital toolsets
and technology that our faculty and student support teams utilize to serve and educate students throughout their
academic life cycle. These upgrades are expected to further enhance student experiences, especially for our
non-traditional adult learners, while driving efficiencies within the business.

Learning Management System

Construction of, and ongoing enhancement to, a virtual campus that engages online students with their
instructor, peers and content is critical to the achievement of student learning outcomes. CTU and AIU’s online
instructional delivery is accomplished using an innovative, student-focused learning management system. While
online content delivery is very common today, our course content delivery system has several features that make
it distinctive. Designed around students, our course content delivery system is a rich, engaging student
experience that represents an innovative online method of delivering content.

Personalized Learning Technology

Perdoceo has implemented the use of sophisticated personalized learning technologies through our virtual
campus. Through our equity investment in and license of technology from CCKF, a Dublin-based educational
technology company that provides intelligent, adaptive systems to power the delivery of personalized learning,
we have strengthened our leadership position as a technology innovator in higher education and as a company
dedicated to student success. Our personalized learning content was developed by teams of our own instructors
and has been integrated across many of our curricula. We have a perpetual license to this technology, which,
when integrated with our proprietary learning management system, we refer to as intellipath.®

Intellipath serves as a powerful platform to help our students learn. It identifies and gives more time in
areas where students need more help, while moving past areas they already know, thereby giving students more
control of their academic progress. Students report feeling a stronger sense of confidence as they proactively
address learning gaps and engage in the learning process at a deeper level. In many respects, personalized
learning serves as an excellent way to facilitate and demonstrate mastery in a competency-based learning
environment. Personalized learning is changing the nature of higher education by measuring real-time knowledge
growth minute-by-minute and understanding of the material on a student-by-student basis.

Our implementation of intellipath is coupled with extensive faculty training. The success of this
personalized learning platform lies in the abundance of data it collects, which in turn helps our instructors
determine how to structure courses, deliver material to students, predict and mitigate individual student
challenges and identify teaching practices that yield the strongest results. Continuous assessment facilitates the
development of individualized, dynamic learning maps that both illustrate where student mastery has been
achieved and where additional work is needed. Both the student and the instructor can see in real time where
learning has taken place and where effort still needs to be applied. A major difference between our platform and
others is that it focuses on student learning achievements rather than solely on student satisfaction or how fast it
facilitates a student to complete assignments.

This academic and technological breakthrough continues to advance our understanding of the learning

process and supports improved student academic outcomes. We believe our intellipath personalized learning
platform provides our institutions a strategic advantage by providing a more customized student experience.

7

Mobile Applications

Students at CTU and AIU have access to a mobile application and two-way messaging platform which were

created to complement students’ mobile-centric lives. Approximately 95% of our students within these
universities have opted in for the mobile application and to receive mobile notifications. Our students and staff
are using the messenger due to its ease and simplicity. The student benefits of these technology innovations
include the ability to connect with their university in a different way, communicate efficiently with faculty,
upload required documentation, track grades and degree progress in real-time and participate in courses from the
palm of their hand, all of which contribute to increased student engagement. CTU and AIU also have a faculty
mobile application which provides informative dashboards, ability to complete tasks on the go and enhanced
outreach and communication capabilities that we believe make teacher-student interactions easier and more
effective.

Faculty

Our institutions employ approximately 2,300 credentialed, geographically dispersed, full-time and adjunct

(i.e., part-time) faculty who facilitate learning in our classrooms and virtual classrooms. Our faculty are hired,
assigned, developed and evaluated in accordance with current accepted higher education practices and in
accordance with state, institutional accreditation and programmatic accreditation standards. Generally, our
institutions require the instructor for any degree program courses to have a degree at least one level higher than
the level of the course being taught (with the exception of faculty in our doctoral programs) plus teaching and/or
industry experience. General education faculty members must possess at least a master’s degree. The average
tenure of a Perdoceo faculty member is approximately six years. We believe the longevity of our instructors is a
testament to the focus we place on student learning and the consistent quality we strive for in our classrooms.

Faculty Competencies

With the input of faculty and academic leadership at our universities, we have developed a set of instructor
competencies that we believe are critical to student success and institutional effectiveness. These competencies
provide the basis for faculty recruitment, hiring, orientation, evaluation and development. Faculty hired by our
academic institutions are evaluated for proficiency in the following competencies:

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

communication;

assessment of student learning;

instructional methodology (pedagogy);

subject matter expertise;

utilization of technology to enhance teaching and learning;

acknowledgement and accommodation of diversity in learners;

student engagement;

promotion of active student learning;

compliance with academic institution policy; and

demonstration of scholarship.

Seasonality and Fluctuations in Results

Our quarterly net revenues and income may fluctuate primarily as a result of the pattern of student
enrollments. As a result, changes in the academic calendar may have an impact on quarterly comparability as
each quarter may have non-comparable revenue-earning days because the academic calendar may align

8

differently with each calendar year and the quarters therein. While operating costs for our institutions generally
do not fluctuate significantly on a quarterly basis, we do traditionally increase our marketing investments during
the first and third quarters in relation to the traditional back to school seasons.

Human Capital

As of December 31, 2021, we had approximately 4,300 employees, of which approximately 1,900 work for
CTU and approximately 1,700 work for AIUS, with the remainder being corporate-level employees in areas such
as marketing, information technology, financial aid, accounting, human resources, legal and compliance. Our
employees include approximately 2,000 part-time adjunct faculty members and approximately 120 full-time
faculty members. Other than our part-time adjunct faculty members, we have less than 60 part-time employees,
some of which are student employees under the federal work study program.

At the start of the COVID-19 pandemic in March of 2020, we transitioned our workforce to a remote work

environment. The transition to a remote work environment was supported by our scalable and innovative
technology infrastructure which enabled us to make these changes with minimal disruptions to our business
operations. As a result of the success of this transition, the Company made the decision during 2021 to allow its
employees to continue in a hybrid work environment, which provides employees with the flexibility of working
remotely or working from the corporate or campus locations when needed. This hybrid work environment gives
employees and their managers the ability to determine what works best for their role in supporting students and
business operations.

The human capital objectives that we focus on reflect the nature of our business, our regulated industry and

our guiding principles and strategic priorities discussed above under the heading “Guiding Principles and
Strategic Priorities.”

We focus on achieving results in a compliant and ethical manner. New employees in student-serving
functions such as admissions and financial aid participate in multi-week training programs and our compliance
monitoring programs and other ongoing compliance efforts in these and other areas are robust. The Compliance
and Risk Committee of our Board of Directors regularly reviews the results of our compliance monitoring
programs and matters reported through the Company’s internal system for reporting compliance concerns in
order to monitor the effectiveness of these programs.

We use technology to support students and enhance learning. Therefore, it is imperative that our employees

in student-serving functions are trained to use our technology and systems for the benefit of our students. This
includes our faculty members who must be proficient in using our online learning management system,
personalized learning technology and mobile applications. We also focus significant human capital resources on
protecting our technology infrastructure and the personal information maintained therein regarding applicants,
our students, their families and our alumni. The Compliance and Risk Committee and the full Board of Directors
regularly review information security matters given their importance to the Company.

Our goal is to deploy resources in the most effective and efficient manner that we believe will lead to
increased stockholder value while supporting and enhancing the academic quality of our institutions. This
philosophy applies to our human capital resources as well. Significant management attention is focused on where
to add human capital and other resources to grow responsibly, while at the same time monitoring human capital
costs and promoting operating efficiencies. Employee turnover impacts human capital costs and operating
efficiencies and as a result we have in the past seen improved operating results associated with improved tenure
within student-serving functions. The Audit Committee of our Board of Directors regularly reviews information
about employee turnover within the Company.

We are committed to a policy of equal employment opportunity. We value diversity and strive to create an
atmosphere that supports the students and communities that we serve. Inclusivity is important in our approach to

9

achieving a dynamic culture. We are committed to fostering an environment where differences are respected and
valued and where employees feel empowered to share their experiences and ideas. The self-identified ethnicity or
race of our full-time employees, including full-time faculty members, is approximately 51% White, 30% Black
or African American, 11% Hispanic, Latinx or Spanish origin, 7% Asian, 0.7% American Indian or Alaskan
Native and 0.3% Native Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander, and our full-time employees are approximately 38%
male and 62% female. The self-identified ethnicity or race of our part-time non-student employees, who are
primarily part-time adjunct faculty members, is approximately 67% White, 23% Black or African American, 5%
Hispanic, Latinx or Spanish origin, 4% Asian, 0.8% American Indian or Alaskan Native and less than 1% Native
Hawaiian or Other Pacific Islander, and our part-time employees are approximately 50% male and 50% female.

INDUSTRY BACKGROUND AND COMPETITION

The domestic postsecondary education industry is highly fragmented and competitive, with no one provider

having a significant market share. The Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended and reauthorized (“Higher
Education Act”), and the related regulations govern all higher education institutions participating in federal
student aid and loan programs under Title IV of the Higher Education Act (“Title IV Programs”). According to
the National Center for Education Statistics (“NCES”), there were approximately 5,900 postsecondary education
institutions eligible for federal student aid in the United States for the academic year 2020-21, including
approximately 2,300 for-profit schools; approximately 1,900 public schools which include state universities and
community colleges; and approximately 1,700 private non-profit schools. According to the U.S. Department of
Education (“ED” or the “Department”), over the 12-month period for academic year 2019-20, approximately
26.1 million students were enrolled in postsecondary institutions.

The domestic postsecondary degree-granting education industry was an approximately $672 billion industry

for academic year 2018-19, according to a report published in 2021 by the Department. We compete in this
industry primarily with other degree-granting regionally-accredited colleges and universities, both for-profit
institutions like ours and public and private non-profit institutions. In particular, there is growing competition
from online programs at these institutions as they increase their online offerings in response to the COVID-19
pandemic and growing prospective student interest.

Most postsecondary institutions, regardless of how they are organized, face significant challenges,

including:

•

•

•

•

•

a continued focus on the cost and availability of a college education;

concerns over the high level of college student indebtedness;

questions about the quality of academic programs and the ability to translate the value of a
postsecondary education into economic mobility;

competition from lower cost alternatives and from non-traditional competitors or new alternative
educational paths; and

the importance of preparing students with relevant skills to manage new and rapidly changing
technologies and supporting employers in their efforts to optimize and advance their workforce.

Postsecondary institutions are also subject to significant regulations which provide for a regulatory triad by

mandating specific regulatory responsibilities for the accrediting agencies recognized by the Department, the
federal government through the Department, and state higher education regulatory bodies.

Extensive and increasingly complex Department regulations governing postsecondary institutions have been

enacted, including regulations applicable only to for-profit institutions. These regulations, coupled with the
increased focus by the U.S. Congress on the role that for-profit educational institutions play in higher education,
as well as the evolving needs and objectives of students and employers, economic constraints affecting
educational institutions and increased focus on affordability and value, may cause increased competition across
the industry as well as contribute to continued changes in business operating strategies.

10

Although competition exists, for-profit educators serve a segment of the market for postsecondary education

that we believe has not been fully addressed by traditional public and private universities. Public and private
non-profit institutions can face limited financial resources to expand their offerings in response to growth or
changes in the demand for education, due to a combination of state funding challenges, significant expenditures
required for research and the professor tenure system. Institutions may also control student enrollments to
preserve the perceived prestige and exclusivity of their degree offerings. For-profit providers of postsecondary
education offer prospective students the greater flexibility and convenience of their institutions’ programmatic
offerings and learning structure and an emphasis on applied content and the use of technology in the delivery of
the education. At the same time, the share of the postsecondary education market that has been captured by
for-profit providers remains relatively small. As a result, we believe that in spite of regulatory and other
challenges facing the industry, for-profit postsecondary education providers continue to have significant
opportunities to address the demand for postsecondary education.

The majority of our degree-seeking students today have one or more non-traditional characteristics (e.g., did

not enroll immediately after high school graduation, work full-time, are financially independent for purposes of
financial aid eligibility, have dependents other than a spouse or are single parents). These non-traditional students
typically are looking to improve their skills and enhance their earning potential within the context of their careers
or in pursuit of new careers. As the industry has shifted to more students with non-traditional characteristics, an
increasing proportion of colleges and universities are addressing the needs of working students. This includes
colleges and universities with well-established brand names that were historically focused on traditional students.

ACCREDITATION, STATE REGULATION AND OTHER COMPLIANCE MATTERS

Institutional Accreditation

In the United States, accreditation is a process through which an institution subjects itself to qualitative
review by an organization of peer institutions. Accrediting agencies primarily examine the academic quality of
the instructional programs of an institution, and a grant of accreditation is generally viewed as confirmation that
an institution’s programs meet generally accepted academic standards. Accrediting agencies also review the
administrative and financial operations of the institutions they accredit to ensure that each institution has the
resources to meet its educational mission.

Pursuant to provisions of the Higher Education Act, the Department relies on accrediting agencies to
determine whether institutions’ educational programs qualify the institutions to participate in Title IV Programs.
The Higher Education Act and its implementing regulations specify certain standards that all recognized
accrediting agencies must adopt in connection with their review of postsecondary institutions.

Both CTU and AIUS are accredited by the Higher Learning Commission (“HLC”)

(www.hlcommission.org), an institutional accrediting agency that is recognized by the Department. CTU’s next
re-affirmation of accreditation is scheduled for 2023. CTU had a comprehensive evaluation in 2017, during
which HLC found that CTU continued to meet HLC’s criteria for accreditation, while requesting that CTU
complete some interim reporting prior to its next re-affirmation of accreditation review. CTU has submitted all
requested interim reports. AIUS’ next re-affirmation of accreditation is scheduled for 2024. AIUS had a
comprehensive evaluation in 2018, during which HLC found that AIUS continued to meet HLC’s criteria for
accreditation.

Programmatic Accreditation

In addition to the institutional accreditation described above, CTU and AIUS have specialized programmatic
accreditation for particular educational programs. Many states and professional associations require professional
programs to be accredited at a program level, and require individuals who must sit for professional license exams
to have graduated from accredited programs. Programmatic accreditation does not satisfy the Department

11

requirements to confer Title IV Program eligibility; however, it does provide additional academic quality review
by peers in a given field and may enable or assist graduates to practice, sit for licensing or certification exams (in
some cases) or otherwise secure appropriate employment in their chosen field. In addition to programmatic
accreditation, some states have licensing boards which regulate who in a state is licensed to practice in a given
profession.

Our universities pursue programmatic accreditation if that accreditation is required by employers or
licensing bodies in order for a graduate to practice the profession or if it is required in order for a graduate to sit
for a licensing or certification exam in order to practice or advance in the profession. In most cases,
programmatic accreditation is sought because it is desired by employers and may enhance the ability of our
graduates to compete for employment in their field.

Programmatic accreditation has been granted by the following accrediting agencies for the following degree

program areas offered by our institutions.

Programmatic Accreditation Table (1)

Accreditor

ABET

Campus

Program Area Accredited (2)

Colorado Technical University,
Colorado Springs

Electrical engineering and
computer engineering

Association for Advancing Quality in
Education Preparation

American InterContinental
University, Chandler

Accreditation Council for Business
Schools and Programs

American InterContinental
University: Atlanta, Houston and
Chandler; Colorado Technical
University: Colorado Springs and
Denver South

Education

Business

Commission on Collegiate Nursing
Education

Colorado Technical University,
Colorado Springs

Nursing

Project Management Institute Global
Accreditation Center

Colorado Technical University:
Colorado Springs and Denver
South

Project management and business

(1) Status as of February 24, 2022.
(2) See the institutional website for a list of programs included in the approval.

State Regulation

State approval agencies are responsible for the oversight of educational institutions, and continued approval

by such agencies is necessary for an institution to operate and grant degrees or certificates to its students. State
laws establish standards for, among other things, student instruction, qualifications of faculty, location and nature
of facilities, and financial policies. State laws and regulations may limit our campuses’ ability to operate or to
award degrees or certificates or offer new programs. Moreover, under the Higher Education Act and Department
regulations, approval by such agencies is necessary to maintain eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs.
Currently, each of our ground-based campuses is authorized by the state in which it is located. Additionally, our
online institutions have separate state approval or recognition from the relevant state agency via participation in a
consortia program called the State Authorization Reciprocity Agreement (“SARA”) in the states in which they
enroll and/or recruit students. California is the only state which is not a part of SARA; however, CTU and AIUS
hold the appropriate approval in that state.

12

SARA is an agreement among member states, districts and U.S. territories that establishes comparable
national standards for interstate offering of postsecondary distance education courses and programs. States,
districts and territories apply to become members of SARA (which, in many cases, requires action by state
legislators) and if accepted, institutions approved in their “home” state may apply to become participants in the
SARA compact and the “home” state authorization is deemed acceptable to operate an online program in other
states that also participate in SARA as long as they do not establish a “physical presence” in those other states (as
defined by SARA). Forty-nine states plus the District of Columbia are SARA participants (www.nc-sara.org).
CTU and AIUS are approved to participate in SARA by their home states (Colorado and Arizona, respectively).

In addition to state education regulations, there are other state agencies that oversee regulations related to

student financing, payment servicing and general consumer protection. In some cases, state laws and regulations
require us to register the volume of payment plans our students enter into and/or require licenses for our
institutions to collect student payments for the educational services they deliver.

Other Compliance Matters

In recent years, states and federal agencies have increased their focus on the for-profit, postsecondary

education sector. This includes increased activity by state attorneys general and the U.S. Federal Trade
Commission (“FTC”) in their review of the sector.

In this regard, on January 3, 2019, the Company entered into agreements with attorneys general from 48

states and the District of Columbia to bring closure to multi-state inquiries ongoing since January 2014. As part
of the agreements, the Company expressly denied any allegations of wrongdoing but agreed to, among other
things, work with a third-party administrator that will report annually for three years on the Company’s
compliance with various obligations the Company committed to in the agreements. Operationally, the Company
committed to:

•

•

•

•

provide students with additional communication of important policies, academic program information
and financial aid information during the enrollment process, including a single page program disclosure
as well as disclosure of applicable refund policies;

provide newly enrolling students an online financial aid interactive tool that can assist them in
understanding their financial commitments;

continue its existing practice of offering a no cost orientation and/or an introductory course with
materials designed to support new college students (if they have less than 24 college credits); and

permit undergraduate students to withdraw with no monetary obligation up to seven days after their
first class at on-campus schools and up to 21 days after the start of the term at online programs (if they
have less than 24 online college credits).

From a compliance standpoint, the Company committed to:

•

•

•

•

continue many of its existing compliance programs that it uses to monitor for accurate communication
with prospective students;

continue its monitoring of third-party marketing vendors and agreed on a process to continue to hold
them accountable for complying with the Company’s advertising guidelines;

continue to monitor and review conversations that its admissions and financial aid staff have with
prospective students during the student recruitment process; and

enhance current training to staff working with students regarding the additional information and tools
that are part of the commitments in the agreements.

Generally, the operational aspects we agreed to as part of the agreements with the attorneys general are for a

six-year period. With respect to working with a third-party administrator, the Company voluntarily agreed to

13

extend the engagement for an additional year beyond the initial three year period to enable the administrator to
continue its review of the Company’s compliance program enhancements adopted over the initial period. Further,
on July 26, 2019, the Company executed a settlement agreement with the FTC to resolve an inquiry commenced
by the FTC in 2015. While not admitting any wrongdoing, the Company chose to settle the FTC inquiry after
almost four years of legal expenses and cooperating with the FTC’s investigation. Under the terms of the
agreement with the FTC, the Company agreed to continue its compliance with the Federal Trade Commission
Act and the Telemarketing and Consumer Fraud and Abuse Prevention Act, including compliance with the
national do not call registry. The Company agreed to enhance its current operational and compliance processes
with respect to prospective student expressions of interest, or “leads,” purchased from third party lead
aggregators and generators and implement other agreed-upon compliance measures. Specifically, the agreement
with the FTC requires the operation of a system to monitor third party lead aggregators and generators involving
a compliance review by, or on behalf of, the Company of the various sources a prospective student interacts with
prior to the Company’s purchase and use of the prospective student lead. In addition, the FTC Agreement
contains requirements regarding employee and lead aggregator acknowledgements of the agreement, compliance
certifications and record creation and maintenance. The principal provisions of the agreement with the FTC will
remain in effect for twenty years.

These agreements and an earlier agreement with the New York Attorney General have led to periodic
requests for information to demonstrate continued compliance with the agreements and applicable regulations.
Compiling data and other information in response to these and other requests from various state and federal
agencies is costly and time consuming and any resulting claim of noncompliance may harm our reputation and
business.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – Our

agreements with multiple state attorneys general and the FTC may lead to unexpected impacts on our student
enrollments or higher than anticipated expenses, a failure to comply may lead to additional enforcement actions
and continued scrutiny may result in additional costs or new enforcement actions,” for more information about
these agreements.

STUDENT FINANCIAL AID AND RELATED FEDERAL REGULATION

A majority of our students require assistance in financing their education. Our institutions are approved to
participate in the U.S. Department of Education’s Title IV federal aid programs. Our institutions also participate
in a number of state financial aid programs, tuition assistance programs of the United States Armed Forces and
education benefits administered by the Department of Veterans Affairs (“VA”). Our institutions that participate in
federal and state financial aid programs are subject to extensive and frequently changing regulatory requirements
imposed by federal and state government agencies, and other standards imposed by educational accrediting
bodies.

Nature of Federal Support for Postsecondary Education in the United States

The U.S. government provides a substantial portion of its support for postsecondary education in the form of

Title IV Program grants, loans and work-study programs to students who can use those funds to finance certain
education related expenses at any institution that has been approved to participate by the Department. These
federal programs are authorized by the Higher Education Act. While most students are eligible for a Title IV
loan, typically, financial aid administered under Title IV is awarded on the basis of financial need, which is
generally defined under the Higher Education Act as the difference between the costs associated with attending
an institution and the amount a student’s family can reasonably be expected to contribute based on a federally
determined formula. Among other things, recipients of Title IV Program funds must maintain a satisfactory grade
point average and progress in a timely manner toward completion of their program of study.

Students at our institutions may receive grants, loans and work-study opportunities to fund their education

under the Title IV Programs described in the sections below. In addition, some students at our institutions receive

14

education related benefits pursuant to certain programs for veterans and military personnel, the most significant
of which are described further below.

Federal Student and Parent Loans

The Department’s major form of aid includes loans to students and parents through the William D. Ford
Federal Direct Loan (“Direct Loan”) Program. Direct Loans are loans made directly by the U.S. Government to
students or their parents. The Direct Loan program offers Federal Direct Stafford, Federal Direct PLUS (which
provides loans to parents of dependent students and to graduate or professional students, known as Parent PLUS
and Grad PLUS) and Federal Direct Consolidation Loans.

Undergraduate students who have demonstrated financial need may be eligible to receive a Direct

Subsidized Loan, with the Department paying the interest on this loan while the student is enrolled at least half-
time in school. Graduate and undergraduate students who do not demonstrate financial need may be eligible to
receive a Direct Unsubsidized Loan. Graduate/professional students may only receive Direct Unsubsidized
Loans. With Direct Unsubsidized Loans the student is responsible for the interest while in school and after
leaving school, although actual interest payments generally may be deferred by the student until after he or she
has left school. Students who are eligible for a Direct Subsidized Loan may also be eligible to receive a Direct
Unsubsidized Loan.

A student is not required to meet any specific credit scoring criteria to receive a Direct Loan, but any student

with a default on a prior loan made under any Title IV Program may not be eligible. The Department has
established maximum annual and aggregate borrowing limits for Direct Loans.

The Direct PLUS Loan Program provides loans to either the parents of dependent students or to graduate

students. Parents and graduate students who have an acceptable credit history may borrow a Direct PLUS Loan
to pay the education related expenses of a child who is a dependent or a graduate student enrolled at least half-
time at our eligible institutions. The amount of a Direct PLUS Loan cannot exceed the student’s cost of
attendance less all other financial aid received.

Federal Pell Grant and Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant

Title IV Program grants are generally made to our students under the Federal Pell Grant (“Pell Grant”)

program and the Federal Supplemental Educational Opportunity Grant (“FSEOG”) program. The 2021-22
maximum annual Pell Grant is $6,495, excluding any additional amount awarded pursuant to a year-round Pell
Grant. Beginning with the 2017-18 award year, eligible students may receive year-round Pell Grant funds. A
year-round Pell Grant program allows students to receive up to 150% of the student’s regular award, allowing
students to maintain their enrollment status and receive Pell Grant funds for up to two additional academic terms
during an award year so that they can continue taking classes and work toward graduating more quickly. To be
eligible for the additional Pell Grant funds, the student must be enrolled at least half-time in the payment
period(s) for which the student receives the additional Pell Grant funds in excess of 100% of the student’s regular
Pell Grant award.

The FSEOG program awards are designed to supplement Pell Grants up to a maximum amount of $4,000
per academic year for the neediest students. Our institutions are required to provide matching funding for FSEOG
awards that represent not less than 25% of the total FSEOG award to be received by eligible students. The
matching may be accomplished through institutional, private and/or state funds.

Federal Work-Study Program

Generally, under the federal work-study program, federal funds are used to pay 75% of the cost of part-time

employment of eligible students to perform work for the institution or certain off-campus organizations. The
remaining 25% is paid by the institution or the student’s employer. In select cases, these federal funds under the
federal work-study program are used to pay up to 100% of the cost of part-time employment of eligible students.

15

Veterans Benefits Programs

Some of our students who are veterans use their benefits under the Montgomery GI Bill or the Post-9/11
Veterans Educational Assistance Act of 2008, as amended (“Post-9/11 GI Bill”), to cover their tuition. A certain
number of our students are also eligible to receive funds from other education assistance programs administered
by the VA.

The Yellow Ribbon program under the Post-9/11 GI Bill expanded education benefits for veterans who have

served on active duty on or after September 11, 2001, including reservists and members of the National Guard.
As originally passed, the Post-9/11 GI Bill provided that eligible veterans could receive benefits for tuition
purposes up to the cost of in-state tuition at the most expensive public institution of higher education in the state
where the veteran was enrolled. In addition, veterans who were enrolled in classroom-based programs or
“blended programs” (programs that combine classroom learning and distance learning) could receive monthly
housing stipends, while veterans enrolled in wholly distance-based programs were not entitled to a monthly
housing stipend. The provisions regarding education benefits for post-9/11 veterans took effect August 1, 2009.
The Post-9/11 GI Bill also increased the amount of education benefits available to eligible veterans under the
pre-existing Montgomery GI Bill. The legislation also authorized expansion of service members’ ability to
transfer veterans’ education benefits to family members.

On January 4, 2011, the Post-9/11 Veterans Educational Assistance Improvements Act of 2010

(“Improvements Act”) was adopted, which amends the Post-9/11 GI Bill in several respects. The Improvements
Act alters the way benefits related to tuition and fees are calculated. For nonpublic U.S. institutions, the
Improvements Act bases the benefits related to tuition and fees on the net cost to the student (after accounting for
state and federal aid, scholarships, institutional aid, fee waivers, and similar assistance paid directly to the
institution for the sole purpose of defraying tuition cost) rather than the charges established by the institution.
The Improvements Act also replaced the state-dependent benefit cap with a single national cap which is adjusted
annually and as of August 1, 2021 is $26,042. In addition, veterans pursuing a program of education solely
through distance learning on a more than half-time basis are eligible to receive up to 50% of the national average
of the basic housing allowance available to service members who are at military pay grade E-5 and have
dependents. Most “Improvements Act” changes took effect on August 1 or October 1, 2011, though changes to
rules regarding eligibility for benefits were effective immediately or retroactively to the effective date of the
Post-9/11 GI Bill. The Improvements Act did not change the Post-9/11 GI Bill’s provision that allows veterans to
receive up to $1,000 per academic year for books, supplies, equipment and other education costs.

U.S. Military Tuition Assistance

Service members of the United States Armed Forces are eligible to receive tuition assistance from their
branch of service through the Uniform Tuition Assistance Program of the Department of Defense (“DoD”).
Service members may use this tuition assistance to pursue postsecondary degrees at postsecondary institutions
that are accredited by accrediting agencies that are recognized by the Department. Each branch of the armed
forces has established its own rules for the tuition assistance programs of DoD.

In 2010, both the U.S. Congress and DoD increased their focus on DoD tuition assistance that is used for

distance education and programs at for-profit institutions. The DoD Voluntary Education Partnership
Memorandum of Understanding (“MOU”) was established as part of the revised DoD Instruction 1322.25,
Voluntary Education Programs dated March 15, 2011. The DoD updated the MOU in 2014 and 2019, in each
case with enhanced requirements for institutions. The MOU requires that participating institutions provide
meaningful information to students about the financial cost and attendance at an institution so military students
can make informed decisions on where to attend school, will not use unfair, deceptive, and abusive recruiting
practices and will provide academic and student support services to service members and their families. It
contains requirements regarding the disclosures of costs and amounts covered by federal educational benefits,
marketing standards, state authorization, accreditation approvals, standard institutional refund policies,

16

educational plans and academic and financial advising. The MOU also incorporates the development and
implementation of the “VA Shopping Sheet,” a standardized cost form with federal aid information which has
evolved into what is now referred to by ED as the “College Financing Plan”. The MOU conveys the
commitments and agreements between the educational institution and DoD prior to accepting funds under the
tuition assistance program. For example, the MOU requires an institution to agree to support DoD regulatory
guidance, adhere to a bill of rights that is specified in the regulations, and participate in the proposed Military
Voluntary Education Review program. Under the MOU, institutions must also agree to adhere to the principles
and criteria established by the Service Members Opportunity Colleges Degree Network System regarding the
transferability of credit and the awarding of credit for military training and experience. Both CTU and AIUS
have signed each of the DoD’s standard MOUs, including the most recent in August 2019 which is effective
through 2024.

Institutional Payment Plans

Some of our students will enter into institutional payment plans with our institutions to pay a portion, or
occasionally all, of their institutional charges directly to the school. This may occur for students who have a gap
between Title IV financial aid funding and other third party aid available to them and the institutional charges or
for students who are enrolled in programs or courses for which Title IV or other financial aid is not offered. We
offer these payment plans over the in-school period, and up to 12 months beyond graduation. The payment plans
do not charge interest.

Eligibility and Certification by the Department

Under the provisions of the Higher Education Act, an institution must apply to the Department for continued
certification to participate in Title IV Programs at least every six years or when it undergoes a change of control.
In addition, an institution must obtain the Department approval for certain substantial changes in its operations,
including changes in an institution’s accrediting agency or state authorizing agency or changes to an institution’s
structure or certain basic educational features.

Institutions approved to participate in Title IV Programs sign a program participation agreement provided

by the Department that describes the terms of participation and includes a number of certifications and
assurances made by the head of the institutions. As long as an institution has submitted an application for
re-certification prior to the expiration of its current program participation agreement, the institution’s eligibility
to participate in Title IV Programs continues on a month-to-month basis until the Department completes its
review. The Department may issue full certification to an institution, it may deny certification or it may elect to
issue provisional certification, in which case the program participation agreement outlines additional
requirements that the institution must meet.

The Department may place an institution on provisional certification status if it finds that the institution does

not fully satisfy all required eligibility and certification standards. During the period of provisional certification,
an institution must obtain prior Department approval to add an educational program, open a new location or
make any other significant change. Provisional certification does not generally limit an institution’s access to
Title IV Program funds. The Department may withdraw an institution’s provisional certification without advance
notice if the Department determines that the institution is not fulfilling all material requirements.

In May 2019, both CTU and AIUS (then known as AIU) received renewals of their program participation
agreements through March 31, 2021. CTU was removed from provisional certification, while AIUS remains on
provisional certification due to open regulatory review processes with the Department at the time of the renewal.
Following the Trident acquisition and AIU’s implementation of a university system model, institutional
accreditation and approval by the Department continues at the system level.

CTU and AIUS each submitted its application for recertification to continue participation in Title IV

Programs on December 21, 2020 and await completion of the Department’s review.

17

In connection with its administration of Title IV Programs, the Department has broad powers to request
information and review records of a participating institution. The Company is in the process of responding to an
extensive request for information received from the Department in December 2021 relating to CTU and AIUS.
Significant resources are required to respond to this request and the Department’s review of the information
provided could lead to additional requests for information or claims of noncompliance with the extensive
regulatory requirements relating to the administration of Title IV Programs.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate –

Compliance with the extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our business can be costly and time
consuming, and failure to comply could result in financial penalties, restrictions on our operations, loss of
federal and state financial aid funding for our students, or loss of our authorization to operate our institutions”
and “ – If the Department denies, or significantly conditions, recertification of either of our institutions to
participate in Title IV Programs, that institution could not conduct its business as it is currently conducted,” and
other risk factors in Item 1A for additional information about the risks surrounding continued participation in
Title IV Programs.

Scrutiny of the For-Profit Postsecondary Education Sector

In recent years, Congress, the Department, states, accrediting agencies, the Consumer Financial Protection
Bureau (“CFPB”), the FTC, state attorneys general and the media have scrutinized the for-profit postsecondary
education sector. Congressional hearings and roundtable discussions were held regarding various aspects of the
education industry, including issues surrounding student debt as well as publicly reported student outcomes that
may be used as part of an institution’s recruiting and admissions practices, and reports were issued that are highly
critical of for-profit colleges and universities. A group of influential U.S. senators, consumer advocacy groups
and some media outlets have strongly and repeatedly encouraged the Department, DoD and the VA and its state
approving agencies to take action to limit or terminate the participation of institutions such as ours in existing
tuition assistance programs. In addition, targeted loan relief to student borrowers is a stated priority for the
Department, and consumer advocacy groups and others are focusing their lobbying and other efforts relating to
student debt forgiveness on for-profit colleges and universities, encouraging loan discharge applications and
complaints by former students.

The current Presidential and Department administrations, as well as Congress, are pursuing significant
legislative, regulatory and administrative actions that will affect our business. For example, as discussed below,
new legislation changing the 90-10 Rule passed in 2021, and numerous existing or former regulations are being
modified or reproposed for future adoption by the Department. Any actions that limit our participation in Title IV
Programs or the amount of student financial aid for which our students are eligible would materially impact our
student enrollments and profitability and could impact the continued viability of our business as currently
conducted. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate.”

Legislative Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives

The U.S. Congress must periodically reauthorize the Higher Education Act and other laws governing Title

IV Programs and annually determines the funding level for each Title IV Program.

The Higher Education Opportunity Act (“HEOA”) was the most recent reauthorization of the Higher
Education Act and was signed into law on August 14, 2008. It was immediately effective for many items with
others effective in subsequent years. The HEOA authorized increases in the Federal Pell Grants, changed certain
grant eligibility requirements, expanded Stafford Loan deferment options, provided changes to needs analysis,
changed treatment of Veterans Administration benefits effective with the 2010-11 award year and revised many
of the regulations governing an institution’s eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs.

Historically, Congress reauthorized the Higher Education Act every five to six years. However, the last full

reauthorization took place in 2008 and Congress has subsequently taken several actions that effectively extend

18

the Higher Education Act and various Title IV Programs on a temporary basis. Congress could work to
reauthorize the Higher Education Act in its entirety, pass a series of smaller bills that focus on individual parts of
the Higher Education Act, primarily Title IV Programs, or continue to extend existing Title IV Programs for
more limited terms while continuing debate on broader policy objectives. Additionally, legislative changes
impacting Title IV Programs is included in broader legislation from time to time. For example, certain legislation
has been passed that is focused on simplifying both access to and repayment of Title IV funds, which should be
of benefit to students. Additionally, on March 11, 2021, President Biden signed a multi-faceted legislative
package that includes new economic stimulus measures broadly targeting various aspects of the U.S. economy.
Congress included in this legislation a modification to the “90-10 Rule” applicable to for-profit institutions that
alters the measurement under the rule from the percentage of Title IV Program tuition revenue an institution
receives to the percentage of “federal educational assistance” an institution receives. While the required ratio to
maintain Title IV Program eligibility will remain at below 90%, specific details on the modified rule and what
constitutes “federal educational assistance” are expected to be determined pursuant to negotiated rulemaking (see
“Negotiated Rulemaking 2022: Institutional and Programmatic Eligibility” below). The legislation specifies that
the earliest the modified rule may apply is for institutional fiscal years beginning on or after January 1, 2023, and
effectiveness for 2023 generally requires that final regulations be published prior to November 1, 2022. See the
“Compliance with Federal Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations” section below for
information about the 90-10 Rule and Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in
Which We Operate – Our institutions could lose their eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid
programs or have other limitations placed upon them if the percentage of their revenues derived from those
programs is too high,” for information regarding risks relating to the 90-10 Rule and this pending rulemaking.

Scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector and the ongoing policy differences in Congress

regarding spending levels could lead to significant regulatory changes in connection with the upcoming
reauthorization of the Higher Education Act, and many of these changes may be adverse to postsecondary
institutions generally or for-profit institutions specifically. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the
Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – The extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our
business may change, in particular as a result of the scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector
and the results of the 2020 Presidential and Congressional elections, which could require us to make substantial
changes to our business, reduce our profitability and make compliance more difficult.”

The Department regularly engages in significant rulemaking efforts intended to develop new regulations

focused on various topics. Recent rulemaking initiatives focused on state authorization, distance learning,
accreditation, educational innovation and other matters. In addition to Department initiatives, recent federal
legislation was passed which is designed to help streamline the financial aid application process for students and
to provide assistance to students as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic.

Two additional regulatory initiatives by the Department of significance have occurred in recent years. First
is the adoption of new “borrower defense to repayment” regulations in 2019. See the “Compliance with Federal
Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations” section below for a description of these
regulations. Further changes to the borrower defense to repayment regulations are being considered (see
“Negotiated Rulemaking 2021: Affordability and Student Loans” below).

Second, the Department’s rulemaking efforts in 2019 resulted in the rescission of previously adopted
“gainful employment” regulations. Perdoceo’s institutions, and most other for-profit institutions, qualify for Title
IV Program participation on the basis that they offer programs that, in addition to meeting other requirements,
“prepare students for gainful employment in a recognized occupation.” During 2013, the Department established
negotiated rulemaking committees, one specifically designed to limit Title IV availability for programs at
for-profit institutions by defining gainful employment in a recognized occupation. On October 30, 2014, the
Department published a new complex final regulation, effective July 1, 2015, to define “gainful employment” as
meeting certain standards measuring the general amount students borrow for enrollment in a program against an
amount of their reported earnings. Prior to this rulemaking, the term gainful employment had been used in the

19

Higher Education Act for forty years, and had not been further defined by Congress or the Department. Through
negotiated rulemaking sessions, the Department considered different options for adopting a uniform set of
requirements that could be applicable to all schools and not specifically targeted at for-profit institutions. After a
public comment period on its proposal, the Department published a final regulation on July 1, 2019 to rescind the
2015 gainful employment regulation effective on July 1, 2020. In lieu of the complex gainful employment
regulation designed to eliminate program eligibility, the Department continued to update the college scorecards it
developed, which apply to all Title IV eligible institutions, with relevant information for prospective students.
While the eligibility tests and disclosures associated with the 2015 gainful employment regulation are no longer
required, the term “gainful employment” continues to exist in the Higher Education Act and CTU’s and AIUS’
Title IV eligible programs will continue to need to be career focused educational programs. The Department has
begun the process of re-adopting a new version of this regulation as part of its 2022 negotiated rulemaking
covering institutional and programmatic eligibility (see “Negotiated Rulemaking 2022: Institutional and
Programmatic Eligibility” below). Initial discussions as part of the negotiated rulemakings have considered
adoption of program eligibility rules that, like the 2015 gainful employment regulation, would measure student
debt at a program level against a measure of earnings. However, these discussions have also included various
potential adjustments that may cause programs that passed the eligibility test under the 2015 gainful employment
regulation to lose Title IV Program eligibility under the new regulation. We are closely monitoring the negotiated
rulemaking process but are unable to determine the potential impact of any final regulations on our business at
this time. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – The
extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our business may change, in particular as a result of the scrutiny
of the for-profit postsecondary education sector and the results of the 2020 Presidential and Congressional
elections, which could require us to make substantial changes to our business, reduce our profitability and make
compliance more difficult,” for information about the potential impact of new regulations on our business.

Negotiated Rulemaking 2021: Affordability and Student Loans

In December 2021, the Department concluded negotiated rulemaking on a number of topics related to
affordability and student loans. Pursuant to the negotiated rulemaking process, the Department, through a series
of three, weeklong meetings in each of October, November and December, worked to develop a notice of
proposed rulemaking with representatives of the parties who would be affected significantly by the regulations. If
a rulemaking committee is able to reach a consensus on its area, then the agreed upon proposal is submitted for
public comment as the proposed regulation, and the final regulation typically aligns closely with the agreed upon
proposal. During this rulemaking process, the Department sought the committee’s consensus on an issue-by-issue
basis, rather than for all the topics included for the committee’s consideration as a whole. The collection of topics
discussed during these negotiations generally relate to different Title IV regulations that impact a student’s
ability to reduce or avoid repaying their student loans. During the process, the Department expressed a goal of
making it easier for students to have their loans discharged or forgiven and providing more favorable loan
repayment terms. The Department also intends to make it easier to seek recovery of discharged loan funds from
institutions through modifications to existing adjudication processes and standards of proof. These goals were
shared by many of the committee participants.

Negotiators reached consensus on four of 12 topics that were open for discussion:

• Discharges for borrowers with a total and permanent disability;

• Eliminating certain interest capitalization events that increase loan costs for students;

• Discharges for when a school falsely certifies a student was eligible for Title IV Program financial aid;

and

•

Pell Grant eligibility for prison education programs.

Negotiators failed to come to agreement on the remaining topics:

• Closed school discharge;

20

• Expanding and simplifying public service loan forgiveness;

• Modifying the borrower defense to repayment processes for students;

• Modifying the process of recovering funds from schools for loans discharged pursuant to the borrower

defense to repayment process;

• Restricting schools from adopting pre-dispute arbitration requirements and waivers of class action

lawsuits; and

• Changes to the income driven loan repayment policies.

With negotiations completed, the next step in the rulemaking process is for the Department to draft and

publish proposed regulations on these topics for public comment. On the four areas where negotiators reached
consensus, the Department is obligated to use the consensus language in the regulatory text it publishes for
comment. On the areas where consensus was not reached, the Department is free to draft language as it sees fit.
The proposed rules may reduce the obligations on students applying for loan discharge and increase the burdens
on institutions that provide documentation regarding student claims. After the public notice and comment period,
if final regulations are published prior to November 1, 2022, the regulations would generally become effective
July 1, 2023. We are closely monitoring the negotiated rulemaking process but are unable to determine the
potential impact of any final regulations on our business at this time. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related
to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – The extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our
business may change, in particular as a result of the scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector
and the results of the 2020 Presidential and Congressional elections, which could require us to make substantial
changes to our business, reduce our profitability and make compliance more difficult,” for information about the
potential impact of new regulations on our business.

Negotiated Rulemaking 2022: Institutional and Programmatic Eligibility

On October 4, 2021, the Department announced its intent to establish another negotiated rulemaking
committee to develop proposed regulations related to institutional and programmatic eligibility. Negotiating
sessions of the institutional and programmatic eligibility negotiated rulemaking committee were held in January
and February 2022, with a third session scheduled in March 2022. As part of the negotiating sessions, the
Department provided issue papers that revealed its intent to impose a number of additional obligations for
schools and programs to remain eligible for Title IV funds. The following topics are included as part of this
negotiated rulemaking process:

• Adopting new regulations to calculate the ratio of a for-profit school’s revenue that is federal education

assistance referred to as “90-10”;

• Adopting a program eligibility rule tied to the term “gainful employment”;

• Establishing Title IV eligibility through an alternative process known as “ability to benefit”;

•

•

Imposing new requirements on owners and operators that sign agreements with the Department to
participate in Title IV Programs;

Placing additional requirements and limits on changes of ownership or control;

• Adopting new events that can lead to the posting of letters of credit or other commitments as part of the

Department’s financial responsibility standards; and

• The Department is proposing to add a number of requirements as obligations schools must satisfy in

order to be considered administratively capable.

In each of the topics currently being negotiated, the Department is proposing rules that impose additional
burdens on schools, and often the proposals being discussed apply to schools unevenly. For example, the “90-10”

21

Rule is an additional annual eligibility test requirement that applies exclusively to for-profit sector schools, but
only one negotiator represents the for-profit sector. The gainful employment rule is designed to primarily impose
additional requirements on for-profit sector programs and many of the proposed modifications to other long
standing existing rules contain new requirements that relate exclusively to for-profit sector schools and their
ownership structures. In the case of the “90-10” Rule, the Department provided limited information on how it
intends to define “federal educational assistance” and instead proposed a number of changes designed to reduce
the amount of favorable tuition revenue a school could include to pass. In the case of gainful employment, the
Department is proposing a number of modifications that make the test more difficult to pass and eliminate
opportunities for programs to make improvements.

The previously adopted and rescinded gainful employment regulation is discussed above in this “Legislative

Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives” section, and please see the “Compliance with Federal
Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations” section below for an overview of the current
rules relating to “90-10,” change of ownership or control, financial responsibility and administrative capability.

Following the completion of the negotiation sessions, the Department intends to publish its proposed
regulations for public comment. Publication of final regulations in the Federal Register must occur on or before
November 1 for the regulations to be effective for the next federal student financial aid award year, which begins
July 1 of the following year. Negotiated rulemaking committees convened in recent years generally have not
reached consensus, resulting in the Department having significant latitude in formulating regulations. We are
closely monitoring the negotiated rulemaking process but are unable to determine the potential impact of any
final regulations on our business at this time. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated
Field in Which We Operate – The extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our business may change, in
particular as a result of the scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector and the results of the 2020
Presidential and Congressional elections, which could require us to make substantial changes to our business,
reduce our profitability and make compliance more difficult,” for information about the potential impact of new
regulations on our business.

Compliance with Federal Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations

To be eligible to participate in Title IV Programs, an institution must comply with the Higher Education Act
and regulations thereunder that are administered by the Department. We and our institutions are regularly subject
to audits and compliance reviews and periodically subject to inquiries, lawsuits, investigations, and/or claims of
non-compliance from federal and state regulatory agencies, accrediting agencies, the Department, present and
former students and employees, and others that may allege violations of statutes, regulations, accreditation
standards or other regulatory requirements applicable to us or our institutions. If the results of any such audits,
reviews, investigations, claims or actions are unfavorable to us, we may be required to pay monetary damages or
be subject to fines, operational limitations, loss of federal funding, injunctions, additional oversight and
reporting, provisional certification or other civil or criminal penalties. In addition, if the Department or another
regulatory agency determined that one of our institutions improperly disbursed Title IV Program funds or
violated a provision of the Higher Education Act or the Department’s regulations, that institution could be
required to repay such funds, and could be assessed an administrative fine.

The Higher Education Act also requires that an institution’s administration of Title IV Program funds be

audited annually by an independent accounting firm and that the resulting audit report be submitted to the
Department for review. In September 2016, the Department’s Office of Inspector General released a revised audit
guide applicable specifically to proprietary schools and third-party servicers administering Title IV programs.
The updated guide is effective for fiscal years beginning after June 30, 2016. The revised audit guide was
effective for us for the year ending December 31, 2017 and applies to annual compliance audits due June 30,
2018 and thereafter. The new guide significantly increases the requirements and testing procedures necessary
when filing our annual Title IV compliance audits.

22

“90-10 Rule”

Under a provision of the Higher Education Act commonly referred to as the “90-10 Rule,” any of our
institutions that, on modified cash basis accounting, derives more than 90% of its cash receipts from Title IV
sources for a fiscal year will be placed on provisional participation status for its next two fiscal years. If an
institution does not satisfy the 90-10 Rule for two consecutive fiscal years, it will lose its eligibility to participate
in Title IV Programs for at least two fiscal years. We have substantially no control over the amount of Title IV
student loans and grants sought by or awarded to our students. If an institution violates the 90-10 Rule and
becomes ineligible to participate in Title IV Programs but continues to disburse Title IV Program funds, the
Department could require repayment of all Title IV Program funds received by it after the effective date of the
loss of eligibility.

We have implemented various measures intended to reduce the percentage of our institution’s cash basis

revenue attributable to Title IV Program funds, including emphasizing employer-paid and other direct-pay
education programs such as our corporate partnerships, diversifying our educational offerings to increase the
portion of our students who do not rely on Title IV Programs, recruitment of international students, the use of
externally funded scholarships and grants and counseling students to carefully evaluate the amount of necessary
Title IV Program borrowing.

Our preliminary calculation of the 90-10 rates for our institutions for the year ended December 31, 2021 is

approximately 84% for CTU and approximately 86% for AIUS, which are in compliance with the 90-10 Rule.
However, as discussed above in “Legislative Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives,” the 90-10
Rule is currently subject to revision as part of a negotiated rulemaking process and we expect the calculation
under the existing rule to be replaced with a new calculation that alters the measurement under the rule from the
percentage of Title IV Program tuition revenue an institution receives to the percentage of “federal educational
assistance” an institution receives, with what constitutes “federal educational assistance” to be defined in
regulations to be adopted following the negotiated rulemaking process. We expect “federal educational
assistance” under the revised rule to be defined more broadly than Title IV Program tuition revenue an institution
receives as under the existing rule, making compliance with the revised rule more difficult. For example,
government education assistance for military or veteran personnel is likely to be considered “federal educational
assistance” under the revised rule.

The ability of our institutions to maintain 90-10 rates below 90% will depend on the impact of future
changes in our student enrollment mix, and regulatory and other factors outside of our control, including any
changes in government education assistance for military or veteran personnel, and changes in the treatment of
such funding for purposes of the 90-10 rate calculation. In addition, changes in, or new interpretations of, the
technical aspects of the calculation methodology or other industry practices under the 90-10 Rule could further
significantly impact our compliance with the 90-10 Rule.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – Our
institutions could lose their eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid programs or have other
limitations placed upon them if the percentage of their revenues derived from those programs is too high,” for
additional information regarding risks relating to the 90-10 Rule.

Student Loan Default Rates

An institution may lose eligibility to participate in some or all Title IV Programs if the rates at which its
former students default on the repayment of their federally-guaranteed or federally-funded student loans exceed
specified percentages. This is determined by an institution’s cohort default rate which is calculated on an annual
basis as a measure of administrative capability. Each cohort is the group of students who first enter into student
loan repayment during a federal fiscal year (ending September 30). An institution’s cohort default rate is
calculated as the percentage of borrowers who entered repayment in the relevant federal fiscal year who default
before the end of the second fiscal year following the fiscal year in which the borrowers entered repayment. This
represents a three-year measurement period.

23

If an institution’s three-year cohort default rate exceeds 10% for any one of the three preceding years, it
must delay for 30 days the release of the first disbursement of U.S. federal student loan proceeds to first time
borrowers enrolled in the first year of an undergraduate program. As a matter of regular practice, our institutions
have implemented a 30-day delay for such disbursements.

If an institution’s three-year cohort default rate exceeds 30% for any given year, it must establish a default
prevention task force and develop a default prevention plan with measurable objectives for improving the cohort
default rate.

Excessive three-year cohort default rates will result in the loss of an institution’s Title IV eligibility, as

follows:

• Annual test. If the three-year cohort default rate for any given year exceeds 40%, the institution will

cease to be eligible to participate in Title IV Programs; and

•

Three consecutive years test. If the institution’s three-year cohort default rate exceeds 30% for three
consecutive years, the institution will cease to be eligible to participate in Title IV Programs.

We have initiatives aimed at reducing the likelihood of our students’ failure to repay their loans in a timely
manner. These initiatives emphasize the importance of students’ compliance with loan repayment requirements
and provide for loan counseling and communication with students after they cease enrollment. Our efforts
supplement the counseling, processing and other student loan servicing work performed by the Department
through contracts it has with select third parties. The quality and nature of the student loan servicing work
performed by the Department has a direct impact on our cohort default rates and we have experienced past
performance failures by the Department and its student loan servicers in outreach to students which adversely
impact the cohort default rates at our institutions.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – Our
institutions could lose their eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid programs or have other
limitations placed upon them if their student loan cohort default rates are greater than the standards set by the
Department,” for additional information regarding risks relating to cohort default rates.

In September 2021, the Department released the official three-year cohort default rates for the 2018 cohort.
Both of our institutions had cohort default rates under the 30% threshold for the 2018 cohort. We increased our
student communication, counseling and other efforts in this area beginning in late 2016 and have begun to see
improvements in the cohort default rate beginning with the 2016 cohort. A listing of the official 2018, 2017 and
2016 three-year cohort default rates for our institutions is provided in the table below.

(Additional locations as defined by accreditors are in parentheses)

2018 (2)

2017 (2)

2016

Institution, Main Campus Location

American InterContinental University (1)

Chandler, AZ (Online) (Atlanta, GA and Houston, TX) . . . . .

15.8% 17.0% 19.2%

Colorado Technical University

Colorado Springs, CO (Denver, CO and Online) . . . . . . . . . .

15.5% 16.0% 18.8%

Cohort Default Rates
3-year rate

(1) Cohort default rates for American InterContinental University do not include results associated with Trident

University.

(2) Rates were modified based on corrections made as part of official appeal processes.

As part of the CARES Act, which was signed into law on March 27, 2020, federal student loan payments

and interest were suspended for a period of time, which the Department has periodically extended currently

24

through May 1, 2022. During this period, student loan borrowers have their loans placed in forbearance, and as
such, are no longer required to make payments on their federal student loans. Consequently, no further defaults
can occur during this period. Based on this forbearance, and more specifically the timing of it, we expect a
favorable impact to the 2019-2020 cohort default rates, with the expectation that these rates will be lower as
compared to 2018, which were also favorably impacted by the forbearance to a lesser extent. After the
forbearance ends, all students will need to resume their next normally scheduled payment. It is unclear how many
students will commence their regularly scheduled payments when the forbearance expires, and whether the loan
servicers will be able to handle the volume of borrowers resuming repayment obligations all at the same time. As
a result, whether this forbearance has any negative impact on future cohorts is unclear.

Borrower Defense to Repayment

On October 28, 2016, the Department adopted new regulations that cover multiple issues including the
processes and standards for the discharge of federal student loans, which are commonly referred to as “borrower
defense to repayment” regulations. The Department initially delayed the effective date of these regulations;
however, after a successful legal challenge against the delay, the Department published guidance to institutions
on March 15, 2019 regarding how to implement the 2016 regulations while noting that a new set of regulations
was forthcoming. On September 23, 2019, the Department published new final “borrower defense to repayment”
regulations that became effective on July 1, 2020. The new 2019 final borrower defense to repayment regulations
are summarized below and will result in a distinct loan discharge process and standards applicable to federal
student loans first disbursed after July 1, 2020. Further changes to the borrower defense to repayment regulations
are being considered. See Legislative Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives—Negotiated
Rulemaking 2021: Affordability and Student Loans” for more information.

2019 Final Regulations – Summary

Loan Discharge. The 2019 borrower defense to repayment regulations significantly alter how loan discharge

applications will be treated by the Department. In addition to adopting the more balanced burden of proof
standard of “preponderance of the evidence,” the 2019 regulations provide for a single new federal standard for a
misrepresentation claim a student may assert against its school. Under the new standard, an individual borrower
may assert a defense to repayment based on the institution’s statement, act, or omission that is false, misleading,
or deceptive. To be eligible for relief, the borrower would be required to demonstrate that the misrepresentation
(1) was made with knowledge of its false, misleading, or deceptive nature or with a reckless disregard for the
truth, (2) was relied upon by the borrower in making an enrollment decision, and (3) caused the student financial
harm.

In addition, the 2019 final regulations eliminate the concept of automatic group loan discharges contained in

the 2016 regulations and require individual claims to be made by students and include a process for the
institution to provide a defense to any claims asserted.

Financial Responsibility. The 2019 final borrower defense to repayment regulations contain a number of
triggering events that will result in an institution not qualifying as financially responsible or administratively
capable. These triggering events include:

•

•

•

•

an order from the SEC that suspends trading in our stock or revokes the registration of our securities or
suspends trading of our stock on its national securities exchange;

failure to timely file required public reports with the SEC without an extension being issued;

notification by Nasdaq that our stock is not in compliance with its exchange requirements and/or may
be delisted; and

two or more concurrent and unresolved discretionary triggering events become mandatory triggering
events.

25

Additionally, the 2019 final regulations include more definitive financial events that will cause the
Department to re-calculate an institution’s most recent financial responsibility composite score to determine
whether the losses or reduction in owner’s equity from the event cause the composite score to fall below 1.0. The
composite score is one measure the Department uses to evaluate an institution’s financial responsibility using
annual financial statements. These triggering events that can lead to the recalculation of a composite score
include, but are not limited to:

•

•

incurring a liability from a settlement, final judgment or final determination arising from an
administrative or judicial action or proceeding initiated by a federal or state entity; and

if our composite score is below 1.5 and we withdraw owner’s equity, such as through a distribution of
dividends.

The 2019 final regulations also keep select discretionary triggering events contained in the 2016 regulations
that allow the Department to designate an institution as not financially responsible. These discretionary triggering
events include:

•

•

•

•

•

•

failure to satisfy the 90-10 Rule in any year;

cohort default rates in excess of 30% for two consecutive years;

citation from a state licensing or authorizing agency of failing to meet state or agency requirements;

an institution is placed on show-cause, probation or similar adverse action threatening an institution’s
accreditation for failure to meet an accreditation standard;

high annual dropout rates, as determined by the Department; and

violation of a provision or requirement in a loan agreement.

The triggering events in the 2019 final regulations are significantly less subjective than a number of the

eliminated triggering events that were included in the 2016 regulations. If any of the triggering events
materialize, our institutions may be required to post a letter of credit equal to 10% or more of the institution’s
previous year’s annual Title IV disbursements.

Repayment Rate Disclosure Eliminated. The 2019 final defense to repayment regulations eliminated a

separate repayment rate disclosure obligation from the 2016 regulations that applied only to for-profit
institutions.

Student Loans Disbursed Prior to July 1, 2020

Prior to the July 1, 2020 effective date of the 2019 final regulations, institutions were required to follow the

2016 regulations, subject to the Department’s guidance and direction. As a result, student loans disbursed
between July 1, 2017 and July 1, 2020 will follow the loan discharge processes outlined in the 2016 regulations.
The 2016 regulations allow the Department to process discharge claims on a group basis, has a much broader
definition of what constitutes an eligible misrepresentation, including inadvertent errors, has a lower burden of
proof for students and fewer due process protections for institutions. Student loans disbursed before July 1, 2017
will follow the Department’s original discharge standards and processes that specify that a borrower may assert a
defense to repayment based on an act or omission by the school that would give rise to a cause of action under
state law. Causes of action under state law are broad and therefore we believe that most student claims would
likely give rise to a cause of action under state law.

Pending Borrower Defense to Repayment Applications

In May 2021, the Department notified the Company that the Department has several thousand borrower
defense applications that make claims regarding the Company’s institutions, including institutions that have

26

ceased operations. As part of the initial fact-finding process, the Department will send individual student claims
to the Company and allow the institutions the opportunity to submit responses to the borrower defense
applications. A large majority of the claims received involve institutions or campuses that have ceased operations
and, in some cases, involve students who attended over 25 years ago. We have submitted initial responses to the
claims received which indicate that we believe the applications fail to establish a valid borrower defense and the
Department should therefore deny them. We continue to respond to substantial requests for information going
back as far as 25 years with respect to these claims. The outcome of the Department’s evaluation of each of these
applications is uncertain.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate -‘Borrower

defense to repayment’ regulations, including closed school discharges, may subject us to significant repayment
liability to the Department for discharged federal student loans and posting of substantial letters of credit that
may limit our ability to make investments in our business which could negatively impact our future growth,” for
more information about risks associated with the borrower defense to repayment regulations.

Financial Responsibility Standards

To participate in Title IV Programs, our institutions must either satisfy standards of financial responsibility

prescribed by the Department, or post a letter of credit in favor of the Department and possibly accept other
conditions on its participation in Title IV Programs. Pursuant to the Title IV Program regulations, each eligible
higher education institution must, among other things, satisfy a quantitative standard of financial responsibility
that is based on a weighted average of three annual tests which assess the financial condition of the institution.
The three tests measure primary reserve, equity and net income ratios. The Primary Reserve Ratio is a measure of
an institution’s financial viability and liquidity. The Equity Ratio is a measure of an institution’s capital resources
and its ability to borrow. The Net Income Ratio is a measure of an institution’s profitability. These tests provide
three individual scores that are converted into a single composite score. The maximum composite score is 3.0. If
the institution achieves a composite score of at least 1.5, it is considered financially responsible without
conditions or additional oversight. A composite score from 1.0 to 1.4 is considered to be in “the zone” of
financial responsibility, and a composite score of less than 1.0 is not considered to be financially responsible. If
an institution is in “the zone” of financial responsibility, the institution may establish eligibility to continue to
participate in Title IV Programs on the following alternative bases:

•

•

Zone Alternative. Under what is referred to as the “zone alternative,” an institution may continue to
participate in Title IV Programs for up to three years under additional monitoring and reporting
procedures but without having to post a letter of credit in favor of the Department. These additional
monitoring and reporting procedures include being transferred from the “advance” method of payment
of Title IV Program funds to cash monitoring status (referred to as Heightened Cash Monitoring 1, or
“HCM1,” status) or to the “reimbursement” or Heightened Cash Monitoring 2 (“HCM2”) methods of
payment. If an institution does not achieve a composite score of at least 1.0 in one of the three
subsequent years or does not improve its financial condition to attain a composite score of at least 1.5
by the end of the three-year period, the institution must satisfy another alternative standard to continue
participating in Title IV Programs.

Letter of Credit Alternative. An institution that fails to meet one of the standards of financial
responsibility, including by having a composite score less than 1.5, may demonstrate financial
responsibility by submitting an irrevocable letter of credit to the Department in an amount equal to at
least 50% of the Title IV Program funds that the institution received during its most recently completed
fiscal year.

• Provisional Certification. If an institution fails to meet one of the standards of financial responsibility,
including by having a composite score less than 1.5, the Department may permit the institution to
participate under provisional certification for up to three years. If the Department permits an institution
to participate under provisional certification, an institution must comply with the requirements of the

27

“zone alternative,” including being transferred to the HCM1, HCM2 or “reimbursement” method of
payment of Title IV Program funds, and must submit a letter of credit to the Department in an amount
determined by the Department which can range from 10%-100% of the Title IV Program funds that the
institution received during its most recently completed fiscal year. If an institution is still not
financially responsible at the end of the period of provisional certification, including because it has a
composite score of less than 1.0, the Department may again permit provisional certification subject to
the terms the Department determines appropriate.

The Department applies its quantitative financial responsibility tests annually based on an institution’s
audited financial statements and may apply the tests if an institution undergoes a change in control or under other
circumstances. The Department also may apply the tests to the parent company of our institutions, and to other
related entities. Our composite score for the consolidated entity for the year ended December 31, 2020 was 3.0,
and our preliminary calculation for the year ended December 31, 2021 is also 3.0, which is the highest possible
score and considered financially responsible without conditions or additional oversight. If in the future we are
required to satisfy The Department’s standards of financial responsibility on an alternative basis, including
potentially by posting irrevocable letters of credit, we may not have the capacity to post these letters of credit.

Accreditor and state regulatory requirements also address financial responsibility, and these requirements
vary among agencies and also are different from the Department requirements. Any developments relating to our
satisfaction of the Department’s financial responsibility requirements may lead to additional focus or review by
our accreditors or applicable state agencies regarding their respective financial responsibility requirements.

See Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate – A failure

to demonstrate ‘financial responsibility’ or ‘administrative capability’ would have negative impacts on our
operations,” for additional information regarding risks relating to the financial responsibility standards.

Return and Refunds of Title IV Program Funds

An institution participating in Title IV Programs must correctly calculate the amount of unearned Title IV
Program funds that were disbursed to students who withdraw from their educational programs, and must return
those funds to the government in a timely manner.

The portion of tuition and fee payments billed to students but not yet earned is recorded as deferred tuition

revenue and reflected as a current liability on our consolidated balance sheets, as such amounts represent revenue
that we expect to earn within the next year. If a student withdraws from one of our institutions prior to the
completion of the academic term, we refund the portion of tuition and fees already paid that we are not entitled to
retain, pursuant to applicable federal and state law and accrediting agency standards and our refund policy. The
amount of funds to be refunded on behalf of a student is calculated based upon the period of time in which the
student has attended classes and the amount of tuition and fees paid by the student as of the student’s withdrawal
date.

Institutions are required to return any unearned Title IV funds within 45 days of the date the institution

determines that the student has withdrawn. An institution that is found to be in non-compliance with the
Department refund requirements for either of the last two completed fiscal years must post a letter of credit in
favor of the Department in an amount equal to 25% of the total Title IV Program returns that were paid or should
have been paid by the institution during its most recently completed fiscal year. As of December 31, 2021, we
have posted no letters of credit in favor of the Department due to non-compliance with the Department refund
requirements.

Change of Ownership or Control

When an institution undergoes a change of ownership resulting in a change of control, as that term is
defined by the state in which it is located, its accrediting agency and the Department, it must secure the approval

28

of those agencies to continue to operate and to continue to participate in Title IV Programs. If the institution is
unable to re-establish state authorization and accreditation requirements and satisfy other requirements for
certification by the Department, the institution may lose its authority to operate and its ability to participate in
Title IV Programs. An institution whose change of ownership or control is approved by the appropriate
authorities is nonetheless provisionally re-certified by the Department for a period of up to three years.
Transactions or events that constitute a change of control by one or more of the applicable regulatory agencies,
including the Department, applicable state agencies, and accrediting bodies, include the acquisition of an
institution from another entity or significant acquisition or disposition of an institution’s equity. It is possible that
some of these events may occur without our control. Our failure to obtain, or a delay in obtaining, a required
approval of any change in control from the Department, applicable state agencies, or accrediting agencies could
impair our ability or the ability of the affected institutions to participate in Title IV Programs. If we were to
undergo a change of control and our institutions failed to obtain the required approvals from applicable
regulatory agencies in a timely manner, our student population, financial condition, results of operations and cash
flows could be materially adversely affected.

When we acquire an institution that is eligible to participate in Title IV Programs, that institution typically

undergoes a change of ownership resulting in a change of control as defined by the Department. Our acquired
institutions in the past have undergone a certification review under our ownership and have been certified to
participate in Title IV Programs on a provisional basis, per Department requirements, until such time that the
Department signs a new program participation agreement with the institution. Currently, neither of our
institutions is subject to provisional certification status due to the Department’s change of ownership criteria. The
potential adverse effects of a change of control under Department regulations may influence future decisions by
us and our stockholders regarding the sale, purchase, transfer, issuance or redemption of our common stock.

Opening New Institutions, Start-up Campuses and Adding Educational Programs

The Higher Education Act generally requires that for-profit institutions be fully operational for two years
before applying to participate in Title IV Programs. However, an institution that is certified to participate in Title
IV Programs may establish a start-up branch campus or location and participate in Title IV Programs at the
start-up campus without reference to the two-year requirement if the start-up campus has received all of the
necessary state and accrediting agency approvals, has been reported to the Department, and meets certain other
criteria as defined by the Department. Nevertheless, under certain circumstances, a start-up branch campus may
also be required to obtain approval from the Department to be able to participate in Title IV Programs.

In addition to the Department regulations, certain of the state and accrediting agencies with jurisdiction over

our institutions have requirements that may affect our ability to open a new institution, open a start-up branch
campus or location of one of our existing institutions, or begin offering a new educational program at one of our
institutions. If we establish a new institution, add a new branch start-up campus, or expand program offerings at
any of our institutions without obtaining the required approvals, we would likely be liable for repayment of Title
IV Program funds provided to students at that institution or branch campus or enrolled in that educational
program, and we could also be subject to sanctions. Also, if we are unable to obtain the approvals from the
Department, applicable state regulatory agencies, and accrediting agencies for any new institutions, branch
campuses, or program offerings where such approvals are required, or to obtain such approvals in a timely
manner, our ability to grow our business would be impaired and our financial condition, results of operations and
cash flows could be materially adversely affected.

Administrative Capability

The Department regulations specify extensive criteria that an institution must satisfy to establish that it has

the requisite administrative capability to participate in Title IV Programs. These criteria relate to, among other
things, institutional staffing, operational standards such as procedures for disbursing and safeguarding Title IV
Program funds, timely submission of accurate reports to the Department and various other procedural matters. If
an institution fails to satisfy any of the Department’s criteria for administrative capability, the Department may

29

require the repayment of Title IV Program funds disbursed by the institution, place the institution on provisional
certification status, require the institution to receive Title IV Program funds under another funding arrangement,
impose fines or limit or terminate the participation of the institution in Title IV Programs.

Restrictions on Payment of Commissions, Bonuses and Other Incentive Payments

An institution participating in Title IV Programs cannot provide any commission, bonus, or other incentive

payment based directly or indirectly on success in securing enrollments or Title IV financial aid to any persons or
entities engaged in any student recruiting or admission activities or in making decisions regarding the award of
student financial assistance. Regulations issued in October 2010 which became effective July 1, 2011 rescinded
previously issued Department guidance and “safe harbors” relied upon by higher education institutions in making
decisions how they managed, compensated and promoted individuals engaged in student recruiting and the
awarding of financial aid and their supervisors. The elimination of these “safe harbor” protections and guidance
required us to terminate certain compensation payments to our affected employees and to implement changes in
contractual and other arrangements with third parties to change structures formerly allowed under Department
rules, and has had an impact on our ability to compensate, recruit, retain and motivate affected admissions and
other affected employees as well as on our business arrangements with third-party lead generators and other
marketing vendors. In September 2016, the Department’s Office of Inspector General released a revised audit
guide applicable specifically to for-profit schools that requires an annual audit to review compliance with the
incentive compensation restrictions.

Further, the Department provided very limited published guidance regarding this rule and does not establish

clear criteria for compliance for many circumstances. If the Department determined that an institution’s
compensation practices violated these standards, the Department could subject the institution to substantial
monetary fines, penalties or other sanctions.

Substantial Misrepresentation

The Higher Education Act prohibits an institution participating in Title IV Programs from engaging in
substantial misrepresentation of the nature of its educational programs, financial charges, graduate employability
or its relationship with the Department. Under the Department’s rules, a “misrepresentation” is any statement
(made in writing, visually, orally or otherwise) made by the institution, any of its representatives or a third party
that provides educational programs, marketing, advertising, recruiting, or admissions services to the institution,
that is false, erroneous or has the likelihood or tendency to deceive, and a “substantial misrepresentation” is any
misrepresentation on which the person to whom it was made could reasonably be expected to rely, or has
reasonably relied, to that person’s detriment. Considering the broad definition of “substantial misrepresentation,”
it is possible that, despite our training efforts and compliance programs, our institutions’ employees or service
providers may make statements that could be construed as substantial misrepresentations. If the Department
determines that one of our institutions has engaged in substantial misrepresentation, the Department may revoke
the institution’s program participation agreement, deny applications from the institution for approval of new
programs or locations or other matters, or initiate proceedings under its borrower defense to repayment
regulations to fine the institution or limit, suspend, or terminate its eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs;
the institution could also be exposed to increased risk of action under the Federal False Claims Act.

OTHER INFORMATION

Our website address is www.perdoceoed.com. We make available within the “Investor Relations” portion of

our website under the caption “Annual Reports and SEC Filings,” free of charge, our annual reports on
Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, and current reports on Form 8-K, including any amendments to
those reports, as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file or furnish such materials to the U.S.
Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). Also, the SEC maintains an Internet site at www.sec.gov that
contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information that we file electronically with the
SEC. Information contained on our website is expressly not incorporated by reference into this Form 10-K.

30

Item 1A. RISK FACTORS

Risks Related to the Highly Regulated Field in Which We Operate

Compliance with the extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our business can be costly and time
consuming, and failure to comply could result in financial penalties, restrictions on our operations, loss of
federal and state financial aid funding for our students, or loss of our authorization to operate our
institutions.

As a provider of postsecondary education and a participant in federal and state programs providing financial

assistance to students, we are subject to extensive laws and regulation at both the federal and state levels and by
accrediting agencies. These requirements cover virtually all aspects of our business.

In particular, the Higher Education Act authorizes Title IV Programs and subjects participants to extensive

regulation by the Department, state education agencies and accrediting agencies. Our institutions’ participation in
education assistance programs administered by the Departments of Defense and Veterans Affairs also subject us
to oversight by those agencies. In addition, other federal agencies such as the Consumer Financial Protection
Bureau (“CFPB”) and the Federal Trade Commission (“FTC”) and various state agencies and state attorneys
general enforce a broad range of consumer protection and other laws applicable to activities of postsecondary
educational institutions, such as recruiting, marketing, the protection of personal information, student financing
and payment servicing.

Because of these regulatory requirements, we are subject to compliance reviews and audits as well as claims
of noncompliance and lawsuits by government agencies, regulatory agencies, students, employees and other third
parties. These matters often require the expenditure of substantial time and resources to address and may damage
our reputation, even if such actions are eventually determined to be without merit. For example, the Department
has broad powers to request information and review records of an institution participating in Title IV Programs.
These requests do not necessarily relate to any specific allegations of wrong-doing or even assert any compliance
failures of any kind. We received such a request in December 2021. In addition to responding to compliance
reviews and audits and other informational requests, we have had significant matters pending against us in the
past which have resulted in the payment of significant amounts to settle the matters and our agreement to
ongoing compliance and operational matters. In this regard, see Item I, “Business – Accreditation, State
Regulation and Other Compliance Matters – Other Compliance Matters,” for discussion of agreements
undertaken in connection with several matters resolved in recent years.

Compliance with reviews and audits and applicable laws, regulations, standards or policies may impose
significant burdens and a failure to comply could result in financial penalties, restrictions on our operations, loss
of federal and state financial aid funding for our students, or loss of authorization to operate our institutions.

The extensive regulatory requirements applicable to our business may change, in particular as a result of the
scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector and the results of the 2020 Presidential and
Congressional elections, which could require us to make substantial changes to our business, reduce our
profitability and make compliance more difficult.

The regulations, standards and policies of our regulators change frequently and are subject to interpretation,
and interpretations may change over time. In particular, the Department has promulgated a substantial number of
new regulations in recent years that impact our business, including but not limited to multiple versions of the
“borrower defense to repayment” regulations discussed in a separate risk factor below.

The U.S. Congress must periodically reauthorize the Higher Education Act and other laws governing Title

IV Programs and annually determines the funding level for each Title IV Program. See Item 1, “Business—
Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation—Legislative Action and Recent Department Regulatory
Initiatives,” for more information about the reauthorization of the Higher Education Act. In recent years,

31

Congress, the Department, states, accrediting agencies, the CFPB, the FTC, state attorneys general and the media
have scrutinized the for-profit postsecondary education sector. See Item 1, “Business—Student Financial Aid and
Related Federal Regulation—Scrutiny of the For-Profit Postsecondary Education Sector,” for more information
about the focus on our industry. This scrutiny and the results of the 2020 Presidential and Congressional elections
could lead to significant regulatory changes in connection with the upcoming reauthorization of the Higher
Education Act. The current Department administration is pursuing significant rule-making initiatives that are
likely to negatively impact our business. See Item 1, “Business—Student Financial Aid and Related Federal
Regulation—Legislative Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives,” for an overview of regulatory
initiatives by the Department.

As they have in the past, future regulatory changes may have significant impacts on our business, potentially

requiring a large number of operational changes, changes to and elimination of certain educational programs or
other fundamental changes to our business. These actions may reduce our student enrollments and profitability or
limit our ability to maintain or grow our business. Future regulatory changes may also make compliance with
regulatory requirements more difficult.

We are dependent on the renewal and maintenance of Title IV Programs.

A substantial majority of our students rely on Title IV Programs to assist in financing their education, and
we derive a substantial majority of our revenue and cash flows from Title IV Programs. For example, for the year
ended December 31, 2021, approximately 78% of all our students who were in a program of study at any date
during that year participated in Title IV Programs, which resulted in Title IV Program cash receipts of
approximately $550 million. As a result, any legislative or regulatory action that significantly reduces Title IV
Program funding or the ability of our students to participate, or that places significant additional burdens on or
eliminates our ability to participate, would materially reduce the number of students who enroll at our
institutions, our revenue and our profitability, and we would be unable to continue our business as it currently is
conducted.

If our institutions become ineligible to participate in educational assistance programs benefitting military or
veteran personnel, it could have a material negative impact on student enrollments and could have other
adverse consequences.

Some students at our institutions receive education-related benefits pursuant to programs for military or

veteran personnel. If any decision is made that reduces our institutions’ eligibility to participate in educational
assistance programs benefitting military or veteran personnel, and if appeals to that decision are not successful,
we could experience a material decline in student enrollments and revenue. In addition, a reduction in our
students’ receipt of education assistance for military or veteran personnel would make it more difficult for our
institutions to comply with the 90-10 Rule (discussed in the next risk factor).

Our institutions could lose their eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid programs or have
other limitations placed upon them if the percentage of their revenues derived from those programs is too
high.

Any of our institutions may lose eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs if, on modified cash basis
accounting, the percentage of the cash receipts derived from Title IV Programs for two consecutive fiscal years is
greater than 90%. Under this 90-10 Rule, an institution that derives more than 90% of its cash receipts from Title
IV sources for a fiscal year will be placed on provisional participation status for its next two fiscal years. We
have substantially no control over the amount of Title IV student loans and grants sought by or awarded to our
students. In addition, if the institution violates the 90-10 Rule and becomes ineligible to participate in Title IV
Programs but continues to disburse Title IV Program funds, the Department would require repayment of all Title
IV Program funds received by it after the effective date of the loss of eligibility.

32

Several factors such as the increase in Title IV Program aid availability, including year-round Pell Grant

funds, and budget-related reductions in state grant programs, workforce training programs and other alternative
funding sources have adversely affected our institutions’ 90-10 Rule percentages in recent years, and we expect
this negative impact to continue. We have implemented various measures intended to reduce the percentage of
our institutions’ cash basis revenue attributable to Title IV Program funds, including efforts to diversify the
sources of our revenue and, in some prior years, managing our cash flow within the parameters permitted by
Department cash management regulations. However, these measures may not be adequate to prevent our
institutions’ 90-10 Rule percentages from exceeding 90% in the future.

The ability of our institutions to comply with the 90-10 Rule will depend on the composition of our future
student population and their personal circumstances and on regulatory and other factors outside of our control,
including any reduction in government education assistance for military and veteran personnel, or changes in the
treatment of such funding for purposes of the 90-10 rate calculation. In addition, there is a lack of clarity
regarding some of the technical aspects of the calculation methodology under the 90-10 Rule, which may lead to
regulatory action or investigations by the Department or other government bodies.

Currently, government education assistance for military and veteran personnel, is not treated as revenue

from Title IV sources and therefore is included in the “10%” portion of the calculation. In March 2021,
legislation was enacted which included a modification to the 90-10 Rule that alters the measurement under the
rule from the percentage of Title IV Program tuition revenue an institution receives to the percentage of “federal
educational assistance” an institution receives. While the required ratio to maintain Title IV Program eligibility
will remain at below 90%, specific details on the modified rule and what constitutes “federal educational
assistance” are being determined pursuant to a negotiated rulemaking process. The Department is proposing to
revise the 90-10 Rule to consider government education assistance for military and veteran personnel in the same
manner as Title IV funds as part of the negotiated rulemaking process. This and other proposed changes to the
90-10 Rule would make it more difficult to comply with the rule and we may be required to alter the manner in
which we conduct our business in order to preserve our students’ ability to benefit from financial assistance for
their education pursuant to Title IV Programs. Any necessary business changes could materially impact our
revenue, operating costs and opportunities for growth. Furthermore, these business changes could make more
difficult our ability to comply with other important regulatory requirements, such as the cohort default rate
regulations.

The Department may have broad discretion to impose additional sanctions on institutions that fail the 90-10
Rule limit, but there is only limited precedent available to predict what those additional sanctions might be in the
future. The Department could specify a wide range of additional conditions as part of the provisional certification
and the institutions’ continued participation in Title IV Programs. These conditions may include, among other
things, restrictions on the total amount of Title IV Program funds that may be distributed to students attending
the institutions; restrictions on programmatic and geographic expansion; requirements to obtain and post letters
of credit; and additional reporting requirements to include additional interim financial or enrollment reporting.

See Item 1, “Business – Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation – Compliance with Federal
Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations—‘90-10 Rule,’” for more information about
the 90-10 Rule and the measures we have implemented to improve our compliance.

If any of our institutions lose eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs due to violation of the current or

modified 90-10 Rule, the institution would experience a dramatic decline in revenue and would be unable to
continue its business as it currently is conducted. Efforts to reduce the 90-10 Rule percentage for our institutions
have and may in the future involve taking measures that reduce our revenue, increase our operating expenses or
involve interpretations of the 90-10 Rule or other Title IV regulations that are without clear precedent (or all of
the foregoing, in each case perhaps significantly).

33

“Borrower defense to repayment” regulations, including closed school discharges, may subject us to
significant repayment liability to the Department for discharged federal student loans and posting of
substantial letters of credit that may limit our ability to make investments in our business which could
negatively impact our future growth.

On October 28, 2016, the Department adopted regulations that cover multiple issues including the processes

and standards for the discharge of student loans, which are commonly referred to as “borrower defense to
repayment” regulations. Included in the 2016 regulations were expansions of the Department’s authority to
process group discharge claims and authority to seek recoupment from institutions. On September 23, 2019, the
Department published new final “borrower defense to repayment” regulations that became effective on July 1,
2020. The processes and standards that apply are determined by the date a student loan is disbursed, and student
loans disbursed before July 1, 2017 will follow the Department’s original discharge standards and processes that
specify that a borrower may assert a defense to repayment based on an act or omission by the school that would
give rise to a cause of action under state law. Further changes to the borrower defense to repayment regulations
are being considered and the Department has expressed a goal of making it easier for students to have their loans
discharged and an intention to make it easier to seek recovery of discharged loan funds from institutions.

In May 2021, the Department notified us of several thousand borrower defense applications that make
claims regarding our institutions, including institutions that have ceased operations. Despite our belief expressed
in initial responses submitted to the Department that the applications fail to establish a valid borrower defense
and the Department should therefore deny them, the Department may grant the applications and assert repayment
claims against us regardless of the date the student loan was disbursed and the corresponding discharge standards
and processes. Our defenses to the asserted repayment liability may not succeed. See Item 1, “Business – Student
Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation – Compliance with Federal Regulatory Standards and Effect of
Federal Regulatory Violations – Borrower Defense to Repayment,” for more information about the borrower
defense to repayment regulations and our responses to these applications.

In addition to discharge of student loans based on an act or omission by a school, Department regulations

provide that upon the closure of an institution participating in the Title IV Programs, including any location
thereof, certain students who had attended such an institution or location may be eligible to obtain a “closed
school discharge” of their federal student loans related to attendance at that institution or location, if they do not
complete their educational programs at another location or online, or through transfer or teach-out with other
postsecondary institutions. In order to obtain a closed school discharge, a student generally must have been
enrolled or on an approved leave of absence when the institution or location closed. The Department’s
regulations historically also provide that students who withdraw from an institution or location within 120 days
prior to the closure may receive a closed school discharge; this time period was expanded to 180 days under the
2019 borrower defense to repayment regulations. Additionally, under the 2016 regulations, the Department may
grant automatic closed school discharges to students who do not re-enroll in another Title IV-participating
institution within three years after becoming unable to complete their educational program due to a closure of
their institution or institutional location. Recently, the Department has asserted loan discharge claims against us
relating to closed campuses in our former All Other Campuses reporting segment for select students that
withdrew or were dismissed from school just prior to a campus closure, despite the availability of a teach-out and
opportunity to complete. In addition, pursuant to our acquisition of substantially all of the assets of Trident
University, Trident University’s operations were brought within the scope of AIUS’ state licensure, accreditation
and Department approval, with Trident University relinquishing its accreditor and Department approvals. As a
result, we may incur closed school discharge liabilities if Trident University students do not complete their
educational program after the closing of the transaction.

The Department’s interpretation and enforcement of the different versions of the borrower defense to
repayment regulations and the related processes and standards is uncertain, and the change in Department
administration and policy objectives under the current Presidential administration is likely to lead to additional
rule modifications regarding borrower defense to repayment and changes in the loan discharge process applicable

34

to outstanding claims. For example, on February 16, 2022, the Department announced that nearly 16,000
borrowers will receive $415 million in borrower defense to repayment discharges following the approval of four
new findings and the continued review of claims. This includes approximately 1,800 former DeVry University
students who will receive approximately $71.7 million in full borrower defense discharges, with the Department
anticipating an increase in these amounts. DeVry University is a for-profit postsecondary institution, and the
Department noted in its announcement that these are the first approved borrower defense claims associated with a
currently operating institution and that it will seek to recoup the cost of the discharges from DeVry University. If
the Department determines that a significant number of borrowers who attended our current, former or acquired
institutions have a defense to repayment of their student loans, we could be subject to significant repayment
liability to the Department, which may limit our ability to make investments in our business and negatively
impact our future growth.

In addition to potential liability associated with loan discharges, both the 2016 and 2019 borrower defense to

repayment regulations include discussion of triggering events that may provide the Department discretion
regarding periodic determinations of our financial responsibility and associated enhanced financial protection in
the form of a letter of credit or other security it determines it needs. If in the future we are required to post a letter
of credit pursuant to the borrower defense to repayment regulations, we may not have the capacity to do so. Even
if we are able to post any required letter of credit, doing so may limit our ability to make investments in our
business which could negatively impact our future growth.

We cannot predict the impact various defense to repayment regulations will have on student enrollments, the
volume of claims for loan discharge (including closed school discharge), the amount of claims for loan discharge
the Department approves, the amount of discharged loans the Department asserts we have repayment liability for,
or our future financial responsibility as determined by the Department, all of which could be materially adverse
to our business.

A failure to demonstrate “financial responsibility” or “administrative capability” would have negative impacts
on our operations.

All higher education institutions participating in Title IV Programs must, among other things, satisfy

financial and administrative standards. Failure to meet these standards may subject an institution to (1) additional
monitoring and reporting procedures, the costs of which may be significant, (2) alterations in the timing and
process for receipt of cash pursuant to Title IV Programs, (3) a requirement to submit an irrevocable letter of
credit to the Department in an amount equal to 10-100% of the Title IV Program funds received during its most
recently completed fiscal year, which we not have the capacity to provide, or (4) provisional certification for up
to three years, in each case depending on the level of compliance with the standards and the Department’s
discretion. See Item 1, “Business – Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation – Compliance with
Federal Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations,” for more information.

Accreditor and state regulatory requirements also address financial responsibility, and these requirements
vary among agencies and also are different from Department requirements. Any developments relating to our
satisfaction of the Department’s financial responsibility requirements may lead to additional focus or review by
our accreditors or applicable state agencies regarding their respective financial responsibility requirements.

If our institutions fail to maintain financial responsibility or administrative capability, they could lose their
eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs, have that eligibility adversely conditioned or be subject to similar
negative consequences under accreditor and state regulatory requirements, which would have a material adverse
effect on our operations. In particular, limitations on participation in Title IV Programs as a result of the failure
to demonstrate financial responsibility or administrative capability could materially reduce the enrollments and
revenue at the impacted institution, and a termination of participation would cause a dramatic decline in revenue
and we would be unable to continue our business as it currently is conducted.

35

Our institutions could lose their eligibility to participate in federal student financial aid programs or have
other limitations placed upon them if their student loan cohort default rates are greater than the standards set
by the Department.

To remain eligible to participate in Title IV Programs, our institutions must maintain student loan cohort

default rates below specified levels. Each cohort is the group of students who first enter into student loan
repayment during a federal fiscal year (ending September 30). If an educational institution’s cohort default rate
exceeds the applicable standards, it may be required to delay for 30 days the release of the first disbursement of
U.S. federal student loan proceeds to first time borrowers, establish a default prevention task force and develop a
default prevention plan with measurable objectives for improving the cohort default rate, be subject to
provisional certification imposing various additional requirements for participating in Title IV Programs or,
depending on the duration or magnitude of the compliance failure, cease participation in Title IV Programs.

See Item 1, “Business – Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation – Compliance with Federal

Regulatory Standards and Effect of Federal Regulatory Violations – Student Loan Default Rates,” for more
information about cohort default rates, the Department’s standards and penalties applicable thereto, the rates for
our institutions and how the CARES Act could negatively impact our rates in the future.

If either of our institutions loses eligibility to participate in Title IV Programs due to student loan default

rates being higher than the Department’s thresholds, we would experience a dramatic decline in revenue and we
would be unable to continue our business as it currently is conducted.

Our agreements with multiple state attorneys general and the FTC may lead to unexpected impacts on our
student enrollments or higher than anticipated expenses, a failure to comply may lead to additional
enforcement actions and continued scrutiny may result in additional costs or new enforcement actions.

As discussed above, states and other regulatory bodies have increased their focus on the for-profit

postsecondary education sector. This includes increased activity by state attorneys general and the FTC in their
review of the sector. In recent years, we entered into various agreements with state attorneys general and the FTC
to bring closure to inquiries by them. See Item 1, “Business – Accreditation, State Regulation and Other
Compliance Matters – Other Compliance Matters” for information about these agreements. These agreements
could ultimately have negative impacts on our business, any one of which could be material. For example,
pursuant to the 2019 agreements with the attorneys general we agreed to work with a third-party administrator
that will report annually for three years on our compliance with various obligations under these agreements. Any
negative findings by the third-party administrator may result in negative consequences to us, such as an extension
of the time period during which we must work with the third-party administrator or an action by one or more
attorneys general seeking enforcement of the agreements. Further, our provision of materials and information in
accordance with the terms of the agreements that do not align with those provided by other institutions could
negatively impact student decisions to enroll or remain enrolled at our institutions. Pursuant to the agreement
with the FTC, we agreed to various operating provisions including the operation of a system to monitor lead
aggregators and generators involving a compliance review by, or on behalf of, the Company of the various
sources a prospective student interacts with prior to the Company’s purchase and use of the prospective student
lead. The compliance costs related to these agreements may be greater than anticipated and may have a negative
impact on our ability to compete effectively and maintain and grow student enrollments at our institutions, and a
failure to comply may lead to additional enforcement actions by the state attorneys general and the FTC. In
addition, we continue to receive requests from state and other regulatory bodies to provide ongoing proof that we
are complying with applicable law and regulations and meeting our contractual obligations pursuant to these
agreements. Compliance with these requests results in significant additional costs and a failure to respond,
whether required or not, could result in additional enforcement actions.

36

If the Department denies, or significantly conditions, recertification of either of our institutions to participate
in Title IV Programs, that institution could not conduct its business as it is currently conducted.

Under the provisions of the Higher Education Act, an institution must apply to the Department for continued
certification to participate in Title IV Programs at least every six years or when it undergoes a change of control.
Generally, the recertification process includes a review by the Department of an institution’s educational
programs and locations, administrative capability, financial responsibility and other oversight categories. AIUS is
currently operating on a provisional program participation agreement due to open regulatory review processes
with the Department at the time of the renewal. During the period of provisional certification, an institution must
obtain prior Department approval to add an educational program, open a new location or make any other
significant change, which could negatively impact our ability to take these actions.

If the Department finds that any of our institutions do not fully satisfy all required eligibility and

certification standards, the Department could limit, suspend or terminate the institution’s participation in Title IV
Programs. Continued Title IV program eligibility is critical to the operation of our business. If either of our
institutions becomes ineligible to participate in Title IV Programs, or have that participation significantly
conditioned, it could not conduct its business as currently conducted and we would experience a dramatic decline
in revenue.

Our institutions would lose their ability to participate in Title IV Programs if they fail to maintain their
institutional accreditation, and our student enrollments could decline if certain of our programs fail to obtain
or maintain programmatic accreditation.

An institution must be accredited by an accrediting agency recognized by the Department in order to
participate in Title IV Programs. See Item 1, “Business – Accreditation, Jurisdictional Authorizations and Other
Compliance Matters – Institutional Accreditation.” The failure to comply with accreditation standards will
subject an institution to additional oversight and reporting requirements, accreditation proceedings such as a
show-cause directive, an action to defer or deny action related to an institution’s application for a new grant of
accreditation or an action to suspend an institution’s accreditation or a program’s approval. Future inquiries or
actions by state or federal agencies could impact our accreditation status. If our institutions or programs are
subject to accreditation actions or are placed on probationary accreditation status, we may experience adverse
publicity, impaired ability to attract and retain students and substantial expense to obtain unqualified
accreditation status. The inability to obtain reaccreditation following periodic reviews or any final loss of
institutional accreditation after exhaustion of the administrative agency processes would result in a loss of Title
IV Program funds for the affected institution and its students. In addition, if an accrediting body of our
institutions loses recognition by the Department, that institution could lose its ability to participate in Title IV
Programs.

Many states and professional associations require professional programs to be accredited. While
programmatic accreditation is not a sufficient basis to qualify for institutional Title IV Program certification,
programmatic accreditation may improve employment opportunities for program graduates in their chosen field.
Those of our programs that do not have such programmatic accreditation, where available, or fail to maintain
such accreditation, may experience adverse publicity, declining enrollments, litigation or other claims from
students or suffer other adverse impacts, which could result in it being impractical for us to continue offering
such programs.

We need timely approval by applicable regulatory agencies to offer new programs or make substantive
changes to existing programs.

Our institutions frequently need to obtain approvals from regulatory agencies in the conduct of their
business. For example, to establish a new educational program or substantive changes to existing programs, we
are required to obtain the appropriate approvals from the Department and applicable state and accrediting

37

regulatory agencies. Staffing levels at the Department and other regulatory agencies and the volume of
applications and other requests may delay our receipt of necessary approvals. Further, approvals may be
conditioned or denied in a manner that could significantly affect our strategic plans and future growth. Approval
by these regulatory agencies may also be negatively impacted due to regulatory inquiries or reviews and any
adverse publicity relating to such matters or the industry generally.

Risks Related to Our Business

Our financial performance depends on the level of student enrollments in our institutions.

Enrollment of students at our institutions is impacted by many of the regulatory risks discussed above and

business risks discussed below, many of which are beyond our control. We also believe that the level of our
student enrollments is affected by changes in economic conditions, although the nature and magnitude of this
effect are uncertain and may change over time. For example, during periods when the unemployment rate
declines or remains stable, prospective students may have more employment options, leading them to choose to
work rather than to pursue postsecondary education. On the other hand, high unemployment rates may affect the
willingness of students to incur loans to pay for postsecondary education or to pursue postsecondary education in
general.

Affordability concerns and negative perception of the value of a college degree increase reluctance to take

on debt and make it more challenging for us to attract and retain students. We may experience decreasing
enrollments in our institutions due to changing demographic trends in family size, overall declines in enrollment
in postsecondary institutions, job growth in fields unrelated to our core disciplines or other societal factors.
Further, we continue to make investments in and changes to our business which are designed to improve student
experiences, retention and academic outcomes and support the long-term sustainable and responsible growth of
our institutions. These initiative may not be successful or the success of these initiatives may reduce over time.

We believe the prolonged COVID-19 pandemic has impacted overall student engagement and we expect

total student enrollments to be impacted in the short-term. Some students have paused their academic programs
or deferred their decision to begin classes. The duration of this change in student behavior and any long-term
impact on total student enrollments is uncertain.

Our student enrollments could suffer from any of these circumstances. It is likely that legislative, regulatory,

and economic uncertainties will continue, and thus it is difficult to assess our long-term growth prospects.
Reduced enrollments at our institutions, for any of the reasons mentioned or otherwise, generally reduce our
profitability, which, depending on the level of the decline, could be material.

We compete with a variety of educational institutions, especially in the online education market, and if we are
unable to compete effectively, our student enrollments and revenue could be adversely impacted.

The postsecondary education industry is highly fragmented and increasingly competitive. Our institutions

compete with traditional public and private two-year and four-year colleges and universities, other for-profit
institutions, other online education providers, and alternatives to higher education, such as immediate
employment and military service. Some public and private institutions charge lower tuition for courses of study
similar to those offered by our institutions due, in part, to government subsidies, government and foundation
grants, tax-deductible contributions and other financial resources not available to for-profit institutions, and this
competition may increase if additional subsidies or resources become available to those institutions. For example,
a typical community college is subsidized by local or state government and, as a result, tuition rates for
associate’s degree programs may be much lower at community colleges than at our institutions. Several states
have adopted or proposed programs to enable residents to attend community colleges for free.

Some of our competitors are more widely known and have more established reputations than our
institutions. In addition, some of our competitors are subject to fewer regulatory burdens on enrollment and

38

financial aid processes, which may enable them to compete more effectively for potential students. In particular,
some of our publicly traded for-profit competitors have converted to a structure where a for-profit service
company provides services to a non-profit educational institution, which reduces the impact of certain regulations
on their operations, such as the 90-10 Rule.

We also expect to experience increased competition as more postsecondary education providers increase

their online program offerings (in particular programs that are geared towards the needs of working adults),
including traditional and community colleges that had not previously offered online education programs, and
increase their use of personalized learning technologies. This trend has been accelerated by the COVID-19
pandemic and companies that provide and/or manage online learning platforms for traditional colleges and
community colleges. Increased competition may create greater pricing or operating pressure on us, which could
have a material adverse effect on our institutions’ enrollments, revenues and profit margins. We may also face
increased competition in maintaining and developing new corporate partnerships and other relationships with
employers, particularly as employers become more selective as to which online universities they will encourage
or offer scholarships to their employees to attend and from which online universities they will hire prospective
employees.

Congress, the Department and other agencies have required increasing disclosure of information to
prospective students (with some disclosures only required by for-profit institutions), and our agreements with
multiple state attorneys general require additional disclosures that are not required by our competitors. Some of
these disclosures may negatively impact a prospective student’s decision to enroll in one of our institutions.

An increase in competition, particularly from traditional colleges with well-established reputations for
excellence, may affect the success of our recruiting efforts to enroll and retain students who are likely to succeed
in our educational programs, or cause us to reduce our tuition rates and increase our marketing and other
recruiting expenses, which could adversely impact our profitability and cash flows.

Our financial performance depends on our ability to develop awareness among, and enroll and retain,
students in our institutions and programs in a cost-effective manner.

If our institutions are unable to successfully market and advertise their educational programs, our

institutions’ ability to attract and enroll prospective students in those programs could be adversely affected. We
have been investing in our student admissions and advising functions and other initiatives to improve student
experiences, retention and academic outcomes. If these initiatives do not continue to succeed, our ability to
attract, enroll and retain students in our programs could be adversely affected. Further, Internet and other
technology, including data gathering and marketing and advertising, is changing fast and we may be unable to
adapt our initiatives to attract, enroll and retain students in a timely manner. Consequently, our ability to increase
revenue or maintain profitability could be impaired. Some of the factors that could prevent us from successfully
marketing our institutions and the programs that they offer include, but are not limited to: student or employer
dissatisfaction with our educational programs and services; diminished access to prospective students; our failure
to maintain or expand our brand names or other factors related to our marketing or advertising practices; FTC or
Federal Communications Commission restrictions on contacting prospective students, Internet, mobile phone and
other advertising and marketing media; costs and effectiveness of Internet, mobile phone and other advertising
programs; and changing media preferences of our target audiences.

We use third-party lead aggregators and generators to help us identify prospective students. The practices of

some lead aggregators and generators have been questioned by various regulatory bodies, which could lead to
changes in the quality and number of prospective student leads provided by these lead aggregators and generators
as well as the cost thereof, which could in turn result in a reduction in the number of students we enroll. Further,
the highly regulated nature of the postsecondary education industry and the resulting compliance measures
undertaken by the industry are burdensome and some lead aggregators may choose not to work with us in favor
of providing their services to different industries. In addition, the number of lead aggregators and generators has

39

reduced over time due to consolidation in that industry, and this could exaggerate the indirect impact on us of any
negative developments within that industry or with respect to any lead aggregator or generator with which we do
business.

We may not be able to retain our key personnel or hire, train and retain the personnel we need to sustain and
grow our business.

Our future success depends largely on the skills, efforts and motivation of our executive officers and other

key personnel, as well as on our ability to attract and retain qualified managers and our institutions’ ability to
attract and retain qualified faculty members and administrators. If any of our executive officers leave the
Company, it may be difficult to hire a replacement with similar experience and skills due to the highly regulated
nature of our business. The political and regulatory uncertainty facing the for-profit postsecondary education
industry may make it difficult to retain key personnel, in particular long-tenured senior officers. Loss of key
personnel in the future could impact our growth, lead to changes in or create uncertainty about our business
strategies or otherwise impact management’s attention to operations.

Our success and ability to grow depends on the ability to hire, train and retain significant numbers of
talented people. We face competition from companies in postsecondary education and other industries in
attracting, hiring and retaining personnel who possess the combination of skills and experiences that we seek to
implement our business strategy. In particular, our performance is dependent upon the availability and retention
of qualified personnel for our student support operations. The negative publicity surrounding our industry
sometimes makes it difficult and more expensive to attract, hire and retain qualified and experienced personnel,
and the Department’s regulations related to incentive compensation affect our ability to compensate admissions
and financial aid personnel. Our ability to effectively train our student support personnel and the length of time it
takes them to become productive also impacts our results of operations. In addition, as a result of the overall
tightening of the labor market and the competitive world for quality employees that has emerged during the
pandemic, we have had increasing difficulty in filling our open positions. This may result in additional costs in
the future as we are required to provide increased compensation in order to attract and retain qualified
employees.

Regulatory changes impacting the for-profit postsecondary education sector may require us to make
substantial changes to our business and explore alternative business strategies to maintain or grow our business.
If our executive officers and other key personnel lack experience necessary to support these changes, we may be
unable to timely attract the talent that we need.

Key personnel may leave us and subsequently compete against us after any period they are contractually
obligated not to pursue such activities. The loss of the services of our key personnel, or our failure to attract, train
and retain other qualified and experienced personnel on acceptable terms and in a timely manner could adversely
affect our results of operations and growth prospects.

Our financial performance depends, in part, on our ability to keep pace with changing market needs and
technology.

Increasingly, prospective employers of students who graduate from our institutions demand that their new

employees possess appropriate technological skills and also appropriate “soft” skills, such as communication,
critical thinking and teamwork skills. These desired skills can evolve rapidly in a changing economic and
technological environment, so it is important for our institutions’ educational programs to evolve in response to
those economic and technological changes. Current or prospective students or the employers of our graduates
may not accept expansion of our existing programs, improved program content and the development of new
programs. Students and faculty increasingly rely on personal communication devices and expect that we will be
able to adapt our information technology platforms and our educational delivery methods to support these
devices and any new technologies that may develop. Even if our institutions are able to develop acceptable new

40

and improved programs in a cost-effective manner, our institutions may not be able to begin offering them as
quickly as prospective students and employers would like or as quickly as our competitors offer similar
programs. If we are unable to adequately respond to changes in market requirements due to regulatory or
financial constraints, rapid technological changes or other factors, our ability to attract and retain students could
be impaired and our revenue and profitability could be adversely affected.

Our future results of operations could be materially adversely affected if we are required to write down the
carrying value of non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities, such as goodwill.

In accordance with U.S. GAAP, we review our non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities, including
goodwill, for impairment on at least an annual basis through the application of fair value-based measurements.
On an interim basis, we review our assets and liabilities to determine if a triggering event had occurred that
would result in it being more likely than not that the fair value would be less than the carrying amount for any of
our reporting units or indefinite-lived intangible assets. Some factors that management considers when
determining if a triggering event has occurred include reviewing the significant inputs to the fair value
calculation and any events or circumstances that could affect the significant inputs, including, but not limited to,
financial performance, legal, regulatory, contractual, competitive, economic, political, business or other factors,
industry and market conditions as well as the most recent quantitative fair value analysis for each reporting unit
and the amount of the difference between the estimated fair value and the carrying value. We determine the fair
value of our reporting units using a combination of an income approach, based on discounted cash flow, and a
market-based approach. To the extent the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount, we will be
required to record an impairment charge in the consolidated statements of income. Our estimates of fair value are
based primarily on projected future results and expected cash flows consistent with our plans to manage the
underlying businesses, including projections of newly acquired businesses. However, should we encounter
unexpected economic conditions or operational results, have unforeseen complications with integration of newly
acquired businesses or need to take additional actions not currently foreseen to comply with current and future
regulations, the assumptions used to calculate the fair value of our assets, estimate of future cash flows, revenue
growth, and discount rates, could be negatively impacted and could result in an impairment of goodwill which
could materially adversely affect our results of operations.

We rely on proprietary rights and intellectual property in conducting our business, which may not be
adequately protected under current laws, and we may encounter disputes from time to time relating to our use
of intellectual property of third parties.

Our success depends in part on our ability to protect our proprietary rights. We rely on a combination of
copyrights, trademarks, service marks, trade secrets, domain names and agreements to protect our proprietary
rights. We rely on service mark and trademark protection in the United States and select foreign jurisdictions to
protect our rights to our marks as well as distinctive logos and other marks associated with our services. These
measures may not be adequate, and we can’t be certain that we have secured, or will be able to secure,
appropriate protections for all of our proprietary rights. Unauthorized third parties may attempt to duplicate the
proprietary aspects of our curricula, online resource material and other content despite our efforts to protect these
rights. Our management’s attention may be diverted by these attempts, and we may need to use funds for
lawsuits to protect our proprietary rights against any infringement or violation.

We may encounter disputes from time to time over rights and obligations concerning intellectual property,
and we may not prevail in these disputes. Third parties may raise a claim against us alleging an infringement or
violation of the intellectual property of that third party. Some third party intellectual property rights may be
extremely broad, and it may not be possible for us to conduct our operations in such a way as to avoid those
intellectual property rights. Any such intellectual property claim could subject us to costly litigation and impose a
significant strain on our financial resources and management personnel regardless of whether such claim has
merit.

41

We may incur liability for the unauthorized duplication or distribution of class materials posted online for
class discussions.

In some instances, our faculty members or our students may post various articles or other third-party content

on class discussion boards or download third-party content to personal computers. We may incur claims or
liability for the unauthorized duplication or distribution of this material. Any such claims could subject us to
costly litigation and could impose a strain on our financial resources and management personnel regardless of
whether the claims have merit.

Risks Related to Our Business Technology Infrastructure

The personal information that we collect may be vulnerable to breach, theft or loss which could adversely
affect our reputation and operations.

In the ordinary course of our business, we maintain on our network systems, and on the networks of our
third-party providers, certain information that is confidential, proprietary, personal (such as student information),
or otherwise sensitive in nature, including financial information and confidential business information. Our
computer networks and those of our vendors that manage confidential information for us or provide services to
our students or us can be accessed globally through the internet and are vulnerable to unauthorized access,
inadvertent access or display, theft or misuse, hackers, installation of ransomware and malware and computer
viruses, during regular use and in connection with hardware and software upgrades and changes. These attacks
have become more prevalent and sophisticated. Unauthorized access, misuse, theft or hacks can evade our
intrusion detection and prevention precautions without alerting us to the breach or loss for some period of time or
may never be detected. A user who circumvents security measures could misappropriate confidential or
proprietary information or personal information about our students or employees or could cause interruptions or
malfunctions in operations or commit fraud. We have experienced malware and virus attacks on our systems
which went undetected by our virus detection and prevention software. Regular patching of our computer
systems and frequent updates to our virus detection and prevention software with the latest virus and malware
signatures may not catch newly introduced malware, ransomware, viruses or “zero-day” viruses, prior to their
infecting our systems and potentially disrupting our data integrity, taking sensitive information or affecting
financial transactions.

In addition to being subject to privacy and information security laws and regulations in the U.S., because
our services can be accessed globally via the Internet, we may also be subject to privacy laws in countries outside
the U.S. from which students access our services, which laws may constrain the way we market and provide our
services. Any breach of student or employee privacy or errors in storing, using or transmitting personal
information could violate privacy laws and regulations resulting in fines or other penalties. The adoption of new
or modified state or federal data or cybersecurity legislation could increase our costs and require changes in our
operating procedures or systems. An example of this is the California Consumer Privacy Act which became
effective January 1, 2020.

A breach, theft or loss of personal information held by us or our vendors, or a violation of the laws and

regulations governing privacy, could have a material adverse effect on our reputation or result in lawsuits,
additional regulation, remediation and compliance costs or investments in additional security systems to protect
our computer networks, the costs of which may be substantial.

System disruptions and vulnerability from security risks to our online technology infrastructure could have a
material adverse effect on our ability to attract and retain students.

For our online and ground-based campuses, the performance and reliability of program infrastructure is
critical to their operations, reputation and ability to attract and retain students. Any computer system or software
error or failure, significant increase in traffic on our computer networks, or any significant failure or
unavailability of our computer networks or third-party software, including but not limited to those as a result of

42

natural disasters and network and telecommunications failures, could materially disrupt our delivery of these
programs. Any interruption to our institutions’ computer systems or operations could have a material adverse
effect on our student enrollments.

As discussed above, our computer networks and those of our vendors are also vulnerable to unauthorized
access, installation of ransomware or malware, computer hackers, computer viruses, denial of service attacks and
other security threats. A user who circumvents security measures could misappropriate proprietary information or
cause interruptions or malfunctions in operations. Due to the sensitive nature of the information contained on our
networks, hackers may target our networks. We expend significant resources to protect against the threat of these
security breaches and may incur significant expenditures to alleviate problems caused by these breaches. We
cannot ensure that our efforts will protect our computer networks against security breaches despite our regular
monitoring of our technology infrastructure security.

Any general decline in Internet use for any reason, including security or privacy concerns, cost of Internet

service or changes in government regulation, could result in less demand for online educational services and
inhibit growth in our online programs.

Our remote work environment in response to the COVID-19 pandemic may exacerbate the risks related to our
business technology infrastructure.

We transitioned almost all of our employees to remote work, as have a number of our third-party service

vendors, in response to the COVID-19 pandemic. This transition to a remote work environment may exacerbate
certain risks to our business, including increasing the stress on, and our vulnerability to disruptions of, our
technology infrastructure and systems, and increased risk of phishing and other cybersecurity attacks,
unauthorized dissemination of confidential information and social engineering attempts that seek to exploit the
COVID-19 pandemic. If a natural disaster, power outage, connectivity issue or other event occurs that impacts
the ability of employees to work remotely, it may be difficult or, in certain cases, impossible, for us to continue
our business for a period of time, which could be substantial. While most of our operations can be performed
remotely, there is no guarantee that we will be as effective while working remotely because our team is
dispersed, many employees may have additional personal needs to attend to (such as looking after children as a
result of school closures or family who become sick), and employees may become sick themselves and be unable
to work.

Government regulations relating to the Internet could increase our cost of doing business or otherwise have a
material adverse effect on our business.

The increasing use of the Internet and other online services has led and may lead to the adoption of new

laws and regulatory practices in the United States or in foreign countries and to new interpretations of existing
laws and regulations. These new laws and interpretations may relate to issues such as online privacy, copyrights,
trademarks and service marks, sales and use taxes, fair business practices and the requirement that online
education institutions qualify to do business as foreign corporations or be licensed in one or more jurisdictions
where they have no physical location or other presence. New laws, regulations or interpretations related to doing
business over the Internet could increase our costs and adversely affect enrollments.

Risk Related to Our Common Stock

The trading price of our common stock may continue to fluctuate substantially in the future, and as a result
returns on an investment in our common stock may be volatile.

The trading price of our common stock has and may fluctuate significantly as a result of a number of

factors, some of which are not in our control. These factors include:

•

the actual, anticipated or perceived impact of changes in the political environment or government
policies;

43

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

the outcomes and impacts on our business of the Department’s rulemakings, and other changes in the
legal or regulatory environment in which we operate;

negative media coverage of the for-profit education industry;

general conditions in the postsecondary education field, including declining enrollments;

the initiation, pendency or outcome of litigation, accreditation reviews, regulatory reviews, inquiries
and investigations, and any related adverse publicity;

failure of certain of our institutions or programs to maintain compliance under the 90-10 Rule or other
regulatory standards;

our ability to meet or exceed, or changes in, expectations of analysts or investors, or the extent of
analyst coverage of our company;

decisions by any significant investors to reduce their investment in us;

quarterly variations in our operating results, which sometimes occur due to the academic calendar and
significant expense items that do not regularly occur;

loss of key personnel;

price and volume fluctuations in the overall stock market, which may cause the market price for our
common stock to fluctuate significantly more than the market as a whole; and

general economic conditions.

Changes in the trading price of our common stock may occur without regard to our operating performance,

and the price of our common stock could fluctuate based upon factors that have little or nothing to do with our
company. Further, the trading volume of our common stock is relatively low, which may cause our stock price to
react more to the above and other factors. The fluctuations in the trading price of our common stock may impact
an investor’s ability to sell their shares at the desired time at a price considered satisfactory, including at or above
the price at which the investor acquired them.

ITEM 1B. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

None.

ITEM 2. PROPERTIES

Our ground-based campuses and their respective facilities include AIU Atlanta (Atlanta, GA), AIU Houston

(Houston, TX), CTU Colorado Springs (Colorado Springs, CO) and CTU Denver South (Aurora, CO). These
campuses generally consist of teaching facilities, including classrooms and laboratories, and administrative
offices. Additionally, we have administrative facilities located in the areas of Chicago, Illinois; Phoenix, Arizona
and Cypress, California, which are used for our universities and corporate functions.

At the start of the COVID-19 pandemic in March of 2020, we transitioned our workforce to a remote work

environment. The transition to a remote work environment was supported by our scalable and innovative
technology infrastructure which enabled us to make these changes with minimal disruptions to our business
operations. With the success of this transition, the Company made the decision during 2021 to allow its
employees to continue in a hybrid work environment, which allows employees with the flexibility of working
remote or working from the corporate or campus locations when needed, and as a result, allows the Company to
continue to look for ways to optimize our leased space.

All of our campus and administrative facilities are leased except one in Houston, Texas. As of December 31,

2021 we leased approximately 0.8 million square feet under lease agreements related to our continuing
operations that have remaining terms ranging from less than one year through 2032. The facility in Houston,
Texas, is used by AIU and is less than 0.1 million square feet of real property.

44

See Item 1, “Business,” for a listing of our campus locations.

ITEM 3. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

See note 12 “Contingencies” to our consolidated financial statements in Item 15 of this Annual Report on

Form 10-K.

ITEM 4. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURES

Not applicable.

45

PART II

ITEM 5. MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER

MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

Our common stock is listed for trading on the Nasdaq Global Select Market (“Nasdaq”) under the symbol

“PRDO”.

The closing price of our common stock as reported on the Nasdaq on February 18, 2022 was $10.21 per
share. As of February 21, 2022, there were approximately 113 holders of record of our common stock, including
The Depository Trust Company, which holds shares of our common stock on behalf of an indeterminate number
of beneficial owners.

Our common stock transfer agent and registrar is Computershare Trust Company, N.A. They can be
contacted at P.O. Box# 505000, Louisville, KY 40233-5000 or at their website www.computershare.com/
investor.

Our Company has never paid cash dividends on our common stock and we have no current plan to do so.

The declaration and payment of dividends on our common stock are subject to the discretion of our Board of
Directors. The decision of our Board of Directors to pay future dividends will depend on general business
conditions, the effect of a dividend payment on our financial condition, and other factors the Board of Directors
may consider relevant. The current policy of our Board of Directors is to reinvest earnings in our operations to
promote future growth and, from time to time, to execute repurchases of shares of our common stock under the
stock repurchase program discussed below. The repurchase of shares of our common stock reduces the amount of
cash available to pay cash dividends to our common stockholders. In addition, our ability to pay cash dividends
on our common stock is also limited under the terms of our existing credit agreement. As of December 31, 2021,
we are in compliance with the covenants of our credit agreement.

During 2021, we repurchased 2.3 million shares of our common stock for approximately $25.3 million at an

average price of $10.94 per share under the Company’s current stock repurchase program. The timing of
purchases and the number of shares repurchased under the program are determined by the Company’s
management and depend on a variety of factors including stock price, trading volume and other general market
and economic conditions, its assessment of alternative uses of capital, regulatory requirements and other factors.
Repurchases will be made in open market transactions, including block purchases, conducted in accordance with
Rule 10b-18 under the Exchange Act as well as may be made pursuant to trading plans established under Rule
10b5-1 under the Exchange Act, which would permit shares to be repurchased when the Company might
otherwise be precluded from doing so under insider trading laws. The stock repurchase program does not obligate
the Company to purchase shares and the Company may, in its discretion, begin, suspend or terminate repurchases
at any time, without any prior notice. The program’s original expiration date was December 31, 2021. On
October 19, 2021, the Board of Directors of the Company extended the expiration date of the program to
February 28, 2022. As of December 31, 2021, approximately $2.9 million was available under the stock
repurchase program.

On January 27, 2022 the Board of Directors of the Company approved a new stock repurchase program for

up to $50.0 million which commences March 1, 2022 and expires September 30, 2023. The other terms of the
new stock repurchase program are consistent with the Company’s current stock repurchase program described
above which expires February 28, 2022.

46

Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities

Total Number of
Shares
Purchased (1)

Average Price
Paid per Share

Total Number of
Shares Purchased
as Part of Publicly
Announced Plans
or Programs

Maximum
Approximate
Dollar Value of
Shares that May
Yet Be Purchased
Under the Plans
or Programs (2)

Period

December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
January 1, 2021 - January 31, 2021 . . . . . . . .
February 1, 2021 - February 28, 2021 . . . . . .
March 1, 2021 - March 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . .
April 1, 2021 - April 30, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . .
May 1, 2021 - May 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
June 1, 2021 - June 30, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
July 1, 2021 - July 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
August 1, 2021 - August 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . .
September 1, 2021 - September 30, 2021 . . .
October 1, 2021 - October 31, 2021 . . . . . . . .
November 1, 2021 -November 30, 2021 . . . .
December 1, 2021 - December 31, 2021 . . . .

—
—
159,989
—
273,578
166,625
—
—
—
—
863,113
1,309,925

$ —
—
12.70
—
12.06
12.45
—
—
—
—
10.37
11.03

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,773,230

$28,231,593
28,231,593
28,231,593
28,231,593
28,231,593
24,927,010
22,850,626
22,850,626
22,850,626
22,850,626
22,850,626
13,878,697
2,889,583

—
—
—
—
273,578
166,474
—
—
—
—
863,113
1,009,435

2,312,600

(1)

Includes 460,630 shares delivered back to the Company for payment of withholding taxes from employees
for vesting restricted stock units pursuant to the terms of the Perdoceo Education Corporation Amended and
Restated 2016 Incentive Compensation Plan.

(2) On November 4, 2019, the Board of Directors of the Company approved a stock repurchase program of up

to $50.0 million with an expiration date of December 31, 2021. On October 19, 2021, the Board of Directors
of the Company extended the expiration date of the program to February 28, 2022. On January 27, 2022 the
Board of Directors of the Company approved a new stock repurchase program for up to $50.0 million which
commences March 1, 2022 and expires September 30, 2023. Amounts relating to the new stock repurchase
program are not included in this chart because the program was approved after December 31, 2021.

See Item 12, “Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder

Matters,” for information as of December 31, 2021, with respect to shares of our common stock that may be
issued under our existing share-based compensation plans.

The graph below shows a comparison of cumulative total returns for Perdoceo, the Standard & Poor’s 500

Index and an index of peer companies selected by Perdoceo. The companies in the peer index are weighted
according to their market capitalization as of the end of each period for which a return is indicated. Included in
the peer index are the following companies whose primary business is postsecondary education: Adtalem Global
Education Inc., American Public Education, Inc., Zovio, Inc., Grand Canyon Education, Inc., and Strategic
Education, Inc. The performance graph begins with Perdoceo’s $10.09 per share closing price on December 31,
2016.

47

COMPARISON OF CUMULATIVE FIVE-YEAR TOTAL RETURN
(Based on $100 invested on December 31, 2016 and assumes the reinvestment of all dividends.)

Market Cap Weighted

100.00

119.72

113.18

125.17

116.55

182.26

400.00

350.00

300.00

250.00

200.00

150.00

100.00

50.00

0.00
12/30/2016

12/30/2017

12/30/2018

12/30/2019

12/30/2020

12/30/2021

Peer Group

Perdoceo Education Corporation

S&P 500 Index

The information contained in the performance graph shall not be deemed “soliciting material” or to be

“filed” with the Securities and Exchange Commission nor shall such information be deemed incorporated by
reference into any future filing under the Securities Act of 1933 or the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as both
are amended from time to time, except to the extent specifically incorporated by reference into such filing.

ITEM 6. Reserved

48

ITEM 7. MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The discussion below contains “forward-looking statements,” as defined in Section 21E of the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, that reflect our current expectations regarding our future growth, results of
operations, cash flows, performance and business prospects and opportunities, as well as assumptions made by,
and information currently available to, our management. We have tried to identify forward-looking statements by
using words such as “anticipate,” “believe,” “expect,” “plan,” “may,” “should,” ”will,” “continue to,”
“focused on” and similar expressions, but these words are not the exclusive means of identifying forward-
looking statements. These statements are based on information currently available to us and are subject to
various risks, uncertainties, and other factors, including, but not limited to, those matters discussed in Item 1A,
“Risk Factors,” in Part I of this Annual Report on Form 10-K that could cause our actual growth, results of
operations, financial condition, cash flows, performance, business prospects and opportunities to differ
materially from those expressed in, or implied by, these statements. Except as expressly required by the federal
securities laws, we undertake no obligation to update such factors or to publicly announce the results of any of
the forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect future events, developments, or changed
circumstances or for any other reason.

As used in this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the terms “we,” “us,” “our,” “the Company,” “Perdoceo”

and “PEC” refer to Perdoceo Education Corporation and our wholly-owned subsidiaries. The terms
“institution” and “university” refer to an individual, branded, for-profit educational institution, owned by us
and including its campus locations. The term “campus” refers to an individual main or branch campus operated
by one of our institutions.

The following Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
(“MD&A”) should be read in conjunction with the Company’s consolidated financial statements and the notes
thereto appearing elsewhere in this Annual Report on Form 10-K. The MD&A is intended to help investors
understand the results of operations, financial condition and present business environment. The MD&A is
organized as follows:

• Overview

• Consolidated Results of Operations

•

•

Segment Results of Operations

Summary of Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates

• Liquidity, Financial Position and Capital Resources

OVERVIEW

Our academic institutions offer a quality postsecondary education primarily online to a diverse student
population, along with campus-based and blended learning programs. Our accredited institutions – Colorado
Technical University (“CTU”) and the American InterContinental University System (“AIUS” or “AIU
System”) – provide degree programs from associate through doctoral level as well as non-degree professional
development and continuing education offerings. Our universities offer students industry-relevant and career-
focused academic programs that are designed to meet the educational needs of today’s busy adults. CTU and
AIUS continue to show innovation in higher education, advancing personalized learning technologies like their
intellipath® learning platform and using data analytics and technology to support students and enhance learning.
Perdoceo is committed to providing quality education that closes the gap between learners who seek to advance
their careers and employers needing a qualified workforce.

Our reporting segments are determined in accordance with Financial Accounting Standards Board

(“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) Topic 280 – Segment Reporting and are based upon how

49

the Company analyzes performance and makes decisions. Each segment represents a postsecondary education
provider that offers a variety of academic programs. We organize our business across two reporting segments:
CTU and AIUS.

On August 2, 2021, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of DigitalCrafts (the “DigitalCrafts

acquisition”). DigitalCrafts helps provide individuals an opportunity in the technology area through reskilling
and upskilling courses within the areas of web development, web design and cybersecurity. DigitalCrafts
operations were brought within the AIUS segment, preserving the ‘DigitalCrafts’ name and programs as part of
AIUS’ operations.

On September 10, 2021, the Company acquired Hippo Education, LLC (“Hippo” and the “Hippo

Acquisition”). Hippo provides continuing medical education and exam preparation for medical professionals with
a quality technology platform and strong course content. Hippo’s operations were brought within the CTU
segment, preserving the ‘Hippo Education’ name and programs as part of CTU’s operations.

On March 2, 2020, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of Trident University International
(“Trident University”), an accredited university offering online undergraduate, master’s and doctoral programs
with a strong focus on graduate programs. Trident University’s operations were brought within the AIUS
segment, preserving the ‘Trident’ name and programs as part of AIU’s operations.

See Note 18 “Segment Reporting” for a description of each of our current reporting segments along with

revenues, operating income and total assets by reporting segment for each of the past three fiscal years.

Regulatory Environment and Political Uncertainty

We operate in a highly regulated industry, which has significant impacts on our business and creates risks
and uncertainties. In recent years, Congress, the Department, states, accrediting agencies, the CFPB, the FTC,
state attorneys general and the media have scrutinized the for-profit postsecondary education sector.
Congressional hearings and roundtable discussions were held regarding various aspects of the education industry
and reports were issued that are highly critical of for-profit colleges and universities. A group of influential U.S.
senators, consumer advocacy groups and some media outlets have strongly and repeatedly encouraged the
Departments of Education, Defense and Veterans Affairs to take action to limit or terminate the participation of
for-profit educational institutions, including Perdoceo, in existing tuition assistance programs. In addition,
targeted loan relief to student borrowers is a stated priority for the Department, and consumer advocacy groups
and others are focusing their lobbying and other efforts relating to student debt forgiveness on for-profit colleges
and universities, encouraging loan discharge applications and complaints by former students.

The current Presidential and Department administrations, as well as Congress, are pursuing significant
legislative, regulatory and administrative actions affecting our business. A loss or material reduction in Title IV
Programs or the amount of student financial aid for which our students are eligible would materially impact our
student enrollments and profitability and could impact the continued viability of our business as currently
conducted.

We encourage you to review Item 1, “Business,” and Item 1A, “Risk Factors,” to learn more about our

highly regulated industry and related risks and uncertainties.

Note Regarding Non-GAAP measures

We believe it is useful to present non-GAAP financial measures which exclude certain significant and
non-cash items as a means to understand the performance of our core business. As a general matter, we use
non-GAAP financial measures in conjunction with results presented in accordance with GAAP to help analyze
the performance of our core business, assist with preparing the annual operating plan, and measure performance

50

for some forms of compensation. In addition, we believe that non-GAAP financial information is used by
analysts and others in the investment community to analyze our historical results and to provide estimates of
future performance.

We believe certain non-GAAP measures allow us to compare our current operating results with respective
historical periods and with the operational performance of other companies in our industry because it does not
give effect to potential differences caused by items we do not consider reflective of underlying operating
performance. In evaluating the use of non-GAAP measures, investors should be aware that in the future we may
incur expenses similar to the adjustments presented below. Our presentation of non-GAAP measures should not
be construed as an inference that our future results will be unaffected by expenses that are unusual, non-routine
or non-recurring. A non-GAAP measure has limitations as an analytical tool, and you should not consider it in
isolation, or as a substitute for net income, operating income, earnings per diluted share, or any other
performance measure derived in accordance with and reported under GAAP or as an alternative to cash flow
from operating activities or as a measure of our liquidity.

Non-GAAP financial measures, when viewed in a reconciliation to respective GAAP financial measures,
provide an additional way of viewing the Company’s results of operations and the factors and trends affecting the
Company’s business. Non-GAAP financial measures should be considered as a supplement to, and not as a
substitute for, or superior to, the respective financial results presented in accordance with GAAP.

2021 Review

During the year ended December 31, 2021 (“current year”), we prioritized resources for academic
operations and technology enhancements and adjusted our processes to support and educate our students as
effectively as possible as they continued to adapt to the challenges presented by the COVID-19 pandemic. Our
financial results include the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions commencing on the respective dates of
acquisition in the current year, and the Trident acquisition commencing on the March 2, 2020 date of acquisition.
The DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions completed during the current year expand the professional development
and continuing education offerings at our academic institutions.

We believe the prolonged pandemic and its resulting social distancing practices and safety measures, as well
as the macro-economic and governmental response, has impacted overall student engagement, particularly during
the latter half of 2021. During the year we experienced some students pause their academic programs or decide
not to begin classes. Additionally, leveraging data analytics, we made adjustments to our marketing strategies
beginning in the third quarter of 2021. We believe these changes will help further improve our ability, in the long
term, to identify prospective students who are more likely to succeed at one of our universities, however we
believe these changes negatively impacted total student enrollments as of December 31, 2021.

As a result of these factors, total student enrollments decreased 5.4% at December 31, 2021 as compared to
December 31, 2020, with CTU increasing by 0.4% and AIUS decreasing by 13.3%. The increase in total student
enrollments for CTU was due to the timing impact of the academic calendar redesign. In early 2021, we
redesigned CTU’s academic calendar to strategically place breaks between sessions and provide more
opportunities for students to continue with their academic programs. We believe this redesign may improve
student experiences and engagement. CTU’s academic calendar redesign, along with the previous academic
calendar redesign at AIU, may impact the comparability of revenue-earning days and enrollment results in any
given quarter. The decrease in total student enrollments for AIUS at December 31, 2021 as compared to
December 31, 2020 was impacted by the factors mentioned above. Additionally, we believe changes in the Army
education administration portal and related technical challenges as well as a reduced number of in-person
recruiting events negatively impacted enrollments of military-affiliated students at Trident.

We believe investments in technology continued to positively impact student experiences and student
learning during 2021. We continued to invest in machine learning and data analytics across the academics and

51

advising functions and we began implementing enhancements to our student technology infrastructure during the
year. The enhancements to our student technology infrastructure are anticipated to be completed over a multi-
year period and include several upgrades to our mobile platform and virtual campus. We believe that continuing
to refine these internet-based student platforms will further enhance the student experience, especially for our
non-traditional adult learners, while driving efficiencies within the business.

We believe that the lingering impact of the COVID-19 pandemic on student engagement as well as the

changes in our marketing strategies discussed above will negatively impact total student enrollments in 2022.
Typically, changes in total student enrollments have a lag impact on revenue, and, as a result, we expect revenue
and operating income for 2022 to be lower as compared to 2021, excluding any positive impacts from
acquisitions or the academic calendar redesign. We will continue our efforts to adjust our operating processes
and expenses to align with overall revenue and enrollment trends, although we do not expect these adjustments to
fully offset the expected revenue decline.

Financial Highlights

Revenue for the year ended December 31, 2021 increased by 0.8% or $5.7 million as compared to the prior
year, reflecting increases in revenue at both CTU and AIUS. The revenue increase for CTU was primarily due to
the Hippo acquisition in September 2021. AIUS’ revenue for the current year was benefitted by the DigitalCrafts
acquisition in August 2021 as well as twelve months of revenue for Trident as compared to ten months in the
prior year. Operating income for the current year increased to $149.0 million as compared to operating income of
$142.9 million for the prior year. The increase in operating income was primarily due to decreased operating
expense associated with advertising and marketing, occupancy, bad debt and admissions for the current year as
compared to the prior year. These benefits more than offset increased legal fee expense relating to loan
forgiveness applications submitted to the Department by former students and acquisition efforts.

The Company believes it is useful to present non-GAAP financial measures, which exclude certain

significant and non-cash items, as a means to understand the performance of its operations. (See tables below for
a GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliation.) Adjusted operating income was $175.5 million for the current year as
compared to $159.0 million in the prior year. The improvement was primarily due to the decrease in advertising
and marketing, occupancy, bad debt and admissions expense as compared to the prior year.

During 2021, we began adjusting operating income and earnings per diluted share for legal fee expense
associated with (i) responses to the Department relating to borrower defense to repayment applications from
former students, and (ii) acquisition efforts, as we believe that these expenses are not reflective of underlying
operating performance. Additionally, we no longer adjust for expenses related to vacated facilities at closed
campuses as these expenses are expected to be immaterial. The prior period amounts were recast for these items
to maintain comparability to 2021 non-GAAP measures.

Adjusted operating income for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020 is presented below (dollars in

thousands, unless otherwise noted):

For the Year Ended
December 31,

2021

2020

Adjusted Operating Income
Operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depreciation and amortization (1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legal fee expense related to certain matters (2) . . . . .

$149,016
16,766
9,735

$142,934
14,786
1,296

Adjusted Operating Income (3)

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

$175,517

$159,016

52

Reported Earnings Per Diluted Share

Pre-tax adjustments included in operating

expenses: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amortization for acquired intangible assets (1) . . . . . . . . . .
Legal fee expense related to certain matters (2) . . . . . . . . . .

Total pre-tax adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tax effect of adjustments (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release of valuation allowance (5)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total adjustments after tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For the Year Ended
December 31,

2021

2020

$ 1.55

$ 1.74

0.06
0.14

0.20

(0.05)
—

0.15

0.04
0.02

0.06

(0.02)
(0.22)

(0.18)

Adjusted Earnings Per Diluted Share (3)

. . . . . . . .

$ 1.70

$ 1.56

(1) Amortization for acquired intangible assets relate to definite-lived intangible assets associated with the

Trident, DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions.

(2) Legal fee expense associated with (i) responses to the Department relating to borrower defense to repayment

applications from former students, and (ii) acquisition efforts.

(3) The Company began adjusting for legal fee expense associated with (i) responses to the Department relating

to borrower defense to repayment applications from former students, and (ii) acquisition efforts, during the
second quarter of 2021. The Company believes that these expenses are not reflective of underlying
operating performance. Also, the Company no longer adjusts for expenses related to the vacated facilities at
closed campuses as these expenses are expected to be immaterial. Prior period amounts were recast for these
items to maintain comparability.

(4) The tax effect of adjustments was calculated by multiplying the pre-tax adjustments with a tax rate of 25%.

This tax rate is intended to reflect federal and state taxable jurisdictions as well as the nature of the
adjustments. There is no tax effect applied to the adjustment related to the release of the valuation allowance
as this is an adjustment for income tax.

(5) The release of a valuation allowance in the amount of $16.0 million was a result of the determination during

the period that it was more likely than not that the Company would utilize its deferred tax assets associated
with the portion of the foreign tax credit carryforward supported by an overall domestic loss account
balance.

COVID-19 Pandemic

Since the outbreak of COVID-19 in March of 2020 we have made several changes to our business
operations in response to the global pandemic. While our universities are primarily online, we have a small
portion of our students at campus locations. Early in the pandemic, we transitioned these students to our online
platform, and during the latter half of 2021 we began to gradually re-open our ground-based campuses for
campus activities and classes. Similarly, during the first year of the pandemic, we transitioned our workforce to a
remote work environment, and during 2021 our employees largely remained remote with certain functions
beginning the transition to a hybrid work model. We continue to provide our employees with support and
resources during this critical time so that they have the tools and information they need to continue supporting
our students. Both our students and our workforce are well supported by our scalable and innovative technology
infrastructure which enabled us to make these changes with minimal disruptions to our business operations.

While we have not experienced any material disruptions to our business operations as a result of the

COVID-19 pandemic to date, we experienced some impacts to student enrollments during 2021 and expect those
impacts to continue into 2022 as discussed above. Our strong balance sheet and technology infrastructure provide
us with the ability to adapt our operations in response to fluctuations in enrollment trends. We continue to
monitor for future impacts of a potential worsening of global economic conditions on our university operations

53

and for changes in prospective student interest or student engagement levels as a result of changes in social
distancing requirements and the U.S. economy.

Title IV Programs

A significant majority of our students rely on Title IV Programs to finance their education and therefore a
significant proportion of our cash receipts come from Title IV Programs. As discussed throughout this Annual
Report on Form 10-K, our participation in Title IV Programs subjects us to extensive regulation. Significant
resources and management time are devoted to monitoring compliance with this complex regulatory framework.
The scrutiny of the for-profit postsecondary education sector and the current Presidential and Department
administrations, including Congress, could lead to significant regulatory changes. Regulatory change is also
likely to continue to be considered by the states and other governmental and regulatory agencies.

As discussed in Item 1, “Business – Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation—Legislative
Action and Recent Department Regulatory Initiatives,” the Department is undertaking significant rulemaking
initiatives. Some of these initiatives are focused on the participation of for-profit postsecondary education
institutions in Title IV Programs. We will continue to closely monitor potential regulatory changes while we
endeavor to manage our business in a way that enhances our ability to comply with any future regulatory
changes. However, depending on the nature of any future regulatory changes, we may be required to alter the
manner in which we conduct our business, perhaps significantly, in order to preserve our students’ ability to
benefit from financial assistance for their education pursuant to Title IV Programs. Necessary business changes
could include voluntarily reducing enrollments in programs eligible for Title IV Program financial assistance and
eliminating certain educational programs, among other things. Changes we make to our business to comply with
regulatory changes may reduce our student enrollments, revenue and profitability and regulatory changes may
impact our ability to maintain or grow our business. Please see Item 1A, “Risk Factors – Risks Related to the
Highly Regulated Field in Which we Operate,” for more information about the risks and uncertainties relating to
our highly regulated industry and potential regulatory changes.

54

CONSOLIDATED RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The summary of selected financial data table below should be referenced in connection with a review of the

following discussion of our results of operations for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020 (dollars in
thousands), including comparisons of our year-over-year performance between these years. Please refer to Item
7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation” in our Annual
Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2020 for a discussion of our results for the year ended
December 31, 2019, as well as the year-over-year comparison of our 2020 financial performance to 2019.

For the Year Ended December 31,

TOTAL REVENUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$693,034

% of
Total
Revenue

2021

% of
Total
Revenue

% of
Total
Revenue

2019

$627,704

2020

$687,314

OPERATING EXPENSES

Educational services and facilities (1)
General and administrative (2):

. . . . .

108,743

15.7% 111,768

16.3% 101,944

16.2%

Advertising and marketing . . . . . . . . .
Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad debt

137,228
96,403
140,529
44,349

19.8% 143,282
13.9%
99,035
20.3% 127,336
47,561
6.4%

20.8% 130,929
14.4%
92,883
18.5% 162,871
43,470
6.9%

Total general and administrative

expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depreciation and amortization . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asset impairment

418,509
16,766
—

60.4% 417,214
14,786
2.4%
612
0.0%

60.7% 430,153
9,145
2.2%
—
0.1%

OPERATING INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149,016

21.5% 142,934

20.8%

86,462

PRETAX INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES . . . . . .

149,084
39,430

21.5% 146,830
22,476
5.7%

21.4%
3.3%

93,022
22,428

Effective tax rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26.4%

15.3%

24.1%

INCOME FROM CONTINUING

20.9%
14.8%
25.9%
6.9%

68.5%
1.5%
0.0%

13.8%

14.8%
3.6%

OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109,654

15.8% 124,354

18.1%

70,594

11.2%

LOSS FROM DISCONTINUED

OPERATIONS, net of tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(17)

0.0%

(90)

0.0%

(612)

-0.1%

NET INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$109,637

15.8% $124,264

18.1% $ 69,982

11.1%

(1) Educational services and facilities expense includes costs attributable to the educational activities of our
universities, including: salaries and benefits of faculty, academic administrators and student support
personnel, and costs of educational supplies and facilities, such as rents on leased facilities and certain costs
of establishing and maintaining computer laboratories. Also included in educational services and facilities
expense are rents on leased administrative facilities, such as our corporate headquarters, and costs of other
goods and services provided by our campuses, including costs of textbooks and laptop computers.
(2) General and administrative expense includes operating expenses associated with, including salaries and
benefits of personnel in, corporate and campus administration, marketing, admissions, information
technology, financial aid, accounting, human resources, legal and compliance. Other expenses within this
expense category include costs of advertising and production of marketing materials and bad debt expense.

Year Ended December 31, 2021 as Compared to the Year Ended December 31, 2020

Revenue

Revenue for the year ended December 31, 2021 (“current year”) increased 0.8% or $5.7 million, driven by
growth in revenue within both CTU and AIUS. The current year increase was benefitted by the DigitalCrafts and

55

Hippo acquisitions, and also benefitted from twelve months of results related to the Trident acquisition as
compared to only ten months in the prior year.

Educational Services and Facilities Expense (dollars in thousands)

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

2021 vs
2020 %
Change

2020 vs
2019 %
Change

Educational services and facilities:

Academics & student related . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 91,426
17,317

$ 90,659
21,109

$ 78,545
23,399

0.8% 15.4%
-18.0% -9.8%

Total educational services and facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$108,743

$111,768

$101,944

-2.7% 9.6%

The educational services and facilities expense for the current year decreased by 2.7% or $3.0 million as
compared to the prior year. Academics and student related expense increased by 0.8% or $0.8 million for the
current year as compared to the prior year, primarily as a result of the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions.
Occupancy expenses for the current year improved by 18.0% or $3.8 million as compared to the prior year,
driven by non-recurring real estate tax credits.

General and Administrative Expense (dollars in thousands)

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

2021 vs
2020 %
Change

2020 vs
2019 %
Change

General and administrative:

Advertising and marketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Admissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad Debt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$137,228
96,403
140,529
44,349

$143,282
99,035
127,336
47,561

$130,929
92,883
162,871
43,470

-4.2%
9.4%
6.6%
-2.7%
10.4% -21.8%
9.4%
-6.8%

Total general and administrative expense . . . . . . . . . . . .

$418,509

$417,214

$430,153

0.3% -3.0%

The general and administrative expense for the current year increased by 0.3% or $1.3 million as compared

to the prior year. This increase was primarily driven by increased administrative expense, which was partially
offset by decreases in advertising and marketing, admissions and bad debt expenses. Administrative expense
increased by 10.4% or $13.2 million primarily due to increased legal fees within Corporate and Other related to
the borrower defense to repayment applications from former students and acquisition efforts as well as expense
for the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions completed in the current year.

The advertising and marketing expense for the current year decreased by 4.2% or $6.1 million as compared

to the prior year, as a result of improved marketing processes related to identifying prospective student interest
within both CTU and AIUS. Admissions expense decreased by 2.7% or $2.6 million as compared to the prior
year, due to lower admissions expense within both CTU and AIUS as a result of the improved marketing
processes mentioned above which also benefit admissions expense.

56

Bad debt expense incurred by each of our segments during the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and

2019 was as follows (dollars in thousands):

For the Year Ended December 31,

% of
Segment
Revenue

2021

% of
Segment
Revenue

% of
Segment
Revenue

2021 vs
2020 %
Change

2020 vs
2019 %
Change

2019

2020

Bad debt expense by segment:

CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $20,150
AIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24,249
Corporate and Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.9% $23,292
8.6% 24,345

5.7% $23,081
8.7% 20,405

5.9% -13.5% 0.9%
8.7% -0.4% 19.3%

(50) NM

(76) NM

(16) NM

NM NM

Total bad debt expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $44,349

6.4% $47,561

6.9% $43,470

6.9% -6.8% 9.4%

Bad debt expense decreased by 6.8% or $3.2 million for the current year as compared to the prior year.

Total bad debt expense as a percentage of revenue also improved for the current year by 50 basis points as
compared to the prior year. CTU’s bad debt expense improved by 13.5% or $3.1 million as compared to the prior
year while AIUS’ bad debt expense remained relatively flat as compared to the prior year.

We continue to expect periodic fluctuations in bad debt expense. We regularly monitor our reserve rates,
which includes a quarterly update of our analysis of historical student receivable collectability based on the most
recent data available and a review of current known factors which we believe could affect future collectability of
our student receivables, such as the number of students that do not complete the financial aid process. Our
student support teams have maintained their focus on financial aid documentation collection and are counseling
students through the Title IV financial aid process so that they are better prepared to start school. We have also
focused on emphasizing employer-paid and other direct-pay education programs such as corporate partnerships
as students within these programs typically have lower bad debt expense associated with them.

Operating Income

Operating income for the current year increased by 4.3% or $6.1 million as compared to the prior year. The

current year improvement was primarily due to decreased advertising and marketing, occupancy, bad debt and
admissions expenses which more than offset the increases in academics and student related and administrative
expenses.

Provision for Income Taxes

For the year ended December 31, 2021, we recorded a tax provision of $39.4 million, which includes a

$1.6 million unfavorable adjustment associated with the tax effect of stock-based compensation and a
$0.5 million favorable adjustment related to federal and state credits claimed for the 2020 tax return and
anticipated for the 2021 tax year. For the full year 2022, we expect our effective tax rate to be between 25.5%
and 26.5%.

For the year ended December 31, 2020, we recorded a tax provision of $22.5 million, which includes a
$16.0 million favorable adjustment related to the release of a valuation allowance maintained against the portion
of the foreign tax credit carryforward supported by an overall domestic loss account balance and a $0.4 million
favorable adjustment associated with the tax effect of stock-based compensation.

SEGMENT RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The summary of segment financial information below should be referenced in connection with a review of

the following discussion of our segment results from operations for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020
(dollars in thousands), including comparisons of our year-over-year performance between these years. Please

57

refer to Part II Item 7, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation”
in our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2020 for a discussion of our results for the
year ended December 31, 2019, as well as the year-over-year comparison of our 2020 financial performance to
2019.

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019 (4)

2021 vs
2020 %
Change

2020 vs
2019 %
Change

REVENUE:

CTU (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (3)

$408,549
283,360
1,125

$405,507
281,361
446

$392,263
235,374
67

0.8% 3.4%
0.7% 19.5%
NM

NM

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$693,034

$687,314

$627,704

0.8% 9.5%

OPERATING INCOME (LOSS):

CTU (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (3)

$148,481
39,130
(38,595)

$138,490
30,822
(26,378)

$108,602
16,413
(38,553)

7.2% 27.5%
27.0% 87.8%
-46.3% 31.6%

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$149,016

$142,934

$ 86,462

4.3% 65.3%

OPERATING INCOME (LOSS) MARGIN:

CTU (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (3)

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36.3%
13.8%
NM

21.5%

34.2%
11.0%
NM

20.8%

27.7%
7.0%
NM

13.8%

(1) CTU’s results of operations include the Hippo acquisition commencing on the September 10, 2021 date of

acquisition.

(2) AIUS’ results of operations include the DigitalCrafts acquisition commencing on the August 2, 2021 date of

acquisition and the Trident acquisition from the March 2, 2020 date of acquisition.

(3) Results of operations for closed campuses are included within Corporate and Other. Revenue recorded

within Corporate and Other relates to miscellaneous non-student related revenue.

(4) An expense of $18.6 million and $11.4 million was recorded within CTU and AIUS, respectively, related to

the FTC settlement during 2019. An expense of $7.1 million was recorded within Corporate and Other for
our closed campuses related to the Oregon arbitration matter during 2019.

Total student enrollments represent all students who are active as of the last day of the reporting period.

Active students are defined as those students who are considered in attendance by participating in class related
activities. Total student enrollments do not include learners participating in non-degree professional development
and continuing education offerings.

58

In early 2021, we redesigned CTU’s academic calendar to strategically place breaks between sessions and

provide more opportunities for students to continue with their academic programs. We believe this redesign may
improve student experiences and engagement. CTU’s academic calendar redesign, along with the previous
academic calendar redesign at AIU, may impact the comparability of revenue-earning days and enrollment
results in any given quarter.

As of December 31,

2021

2020

2019

2021 vs
2020 %
Change

2020 vs
2019 %
Change

TOTAL STUDENT ENROLLMENTS:

CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (1)

24,700
15,700

24,600
18,100

23,600
13,000

0.4% 4.2%
-13.3% 39.2%

Total University Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

40,400

42,700

36,600

-5.4% 16.7%

(1) AIUS includes total student enrollments relating to the Trident acquisition as of December 31, 2021 and

2020.

Year Ended December 31, 2021 as Compared to the Year Ended December 31, 2020

CTU. Current year revenue increased by 0.8% or $3.0 million as compared to the prior year. The current

year increase was benefited by the Hippo acquisition. CTU’s total student enrollments increased 0.4% at
December 31, 2021 as compared to December 31, 2020 due to the timing impact of the academic calendar
redesign.

Current year operating income for CTU increased by 7.2% or $10.0 million as compared to the prior year,

primarily due to decreased bad debt, advertising and marketing and occupancy expenses as compared to the prior
year.

AIUS. Current year revenue increased by 0.7% or $2.0 million as compared to the prior year. The current

year increase was driven by the DigitalCrafts acquisition as well as twelve months of revenue related Trident as
compared to ten months in the prior year. AIUS experienced a decrease in total student enrollment of 13.3% at
December 31, 2021 as compared to December 31, 2020. We believe the decrease in total student enrollments was
caused by several factors, including students pausing their academic programs and prolonged student decision-
making as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic, changes in our marketing and student recruitment processes as
we continue to use technology and data analytics to help us identify prospective students who are more likely to
succeed at one of our universities, and a reduction in student enrollments from the military population.

Current year operating income for AIUS increased by 27.0% or $8.3 million as compared to the prior year,
driven by decreased advertising and marketing, admissions and administrative expenses as compared to the prior
year.

Corporate and Other. This category includes unallocated costs that are incurred on behalf of the entire
company and remaining expenses associated with closed campuses. Total Corporate and Other operating loss for
the current year increased by 46.3% or $12.2 million as compared to the prior year, primarily as a result of
increased legal fee expense associated with the borrower defense to repayment applications from former students
and acquisition efforts.

SUMMARY OF CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES AND ESTIMATES

We have identified the accounting policies and estimates listed below as those that we believe require
management’s most subjective and complex judgments in estimating the effect of inherent uncertainties. This
section should be read in conjunction with Note 2 “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies” to our
consolidated financial statements which includes a discussion of these and other significant accounting policies.

59

Revenue Recognition

Description: Our revenue, which is derived primarily from academic programs taught to students who attend

our universities, is generally segregated into two categories: (1) tuition and fees, and (2) other. Tuition and fees
represent costs to our students for educational services provided by our universities and are reflected net of
scholarships and tuition discounts. Our universities charge tuition and fees at varying amounts, depending on the
university, the type of program and specific curriculum. Our universities bill students a single charge that covers
tuition, fees and required program materials, such as textbooks and supplies, which we treat as a single
performance obligation. Generally, we bill student tuition at the beginning of each academic term for our degree
programs and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the academic term. As part of a
student’s course of instruction, certain fees, such as technology fees and graduation fees, are billed to students.
These fees are earned over the applicable term and are not considered separate performance obligations. We bill
student tuition upon enrollment for our non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings
and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the length of the course.

Assumptions and judgment: Revenue recognition includes assumptions and significant judgments including

determination of the appropriate portfolios to assess for meeting the criteria to recognize revenue under ASC
Topic 606 as well as the assessment of collectability. We analyze revenue recognition on a portfolio approach
under ASC Topic 606. Significant judgment is used in determining the appropriate portfolios to assess for
meeting the criteria to recognize revenue under ASC Topic 606. We have determined that all of our students can
be grouped into one portfolio. Based on our past experience, students at different universities, in different
programs or with different funding all behave similarly. Enrollment agreements all contain similar terms, refund
policies are similar across all institutions and students work with the university to obtain some type of funding,
for example, Title IV Program funds, Veterans Administration funds, military funding, employer reimbursement
or self-pay. We have significant historical data for our students which allows us to analyze collectability. We do
not expect that revenue earned for the portfolio is significantly different as compared to revenue that would be
earned if we were to assess each student contract separately.

Significant judgment is also required to assess collectability, particularly as it relates to students seeking
funding under Title IV Programs. Because students are required to provide documentation, and in some cases
extensive documentation, to the Department to be eligible and approved for funding, the timeframe for this
process can sometimes span between 90 to 120 days. We monitor the progress of students through the eligibility
and approval process and assess collectability for the portfolio each reporting period to monitor that the
collectability threshold is met.

These assumptions and significant judgments are based upon our interpretation of accounting guidance and

historical experience. Although management believes these assumptions and significant judgments to be
reasonable, actual amounts may differ if historical experience is not reflective of future results.

Impact if actual results differ from assumptions and judgment: If actual performance is not consistent with

historical experience in regards to our assessment of collectability, our revenue recognition may be materially
different than what was originally recorded.

Allowance for Credit Losses

Description: We extend unsecured credit to a portion of the students who are enrolled at our academic

institutions for tuition and certain other educational costs. Based upon past experience and judgment, we
establish an allowance for credit losses with respect to student receivables which we estimate will ultimately not
be collectible. Our standard student receivable allowance is based on an estimate of lifetime expected credit
losses for student receivables. Our estimation methodology considers a number of quantitative and qualitative
factors that, based on our collection experience, we believe have an impact on our repayment risk and ability to
collect student receivables. Changes in the trends in any of these factors may impact our estimate of the

60

allowance for credit losses. These factors include, but are not limited to: internal repayment history, changes in
the current economic, legislative or regulatory environments, internal cash collection forecasts and the ability to
complete the federal financial aid process with the student. These factors are monitored and assessed on a regular
basis. Overall, our allowance estimation process for student receivables is validated by trending analysis and
comparing estimated and actual performance.

Assumptions and judgment: Management makes a range of assumptions to determine what is believed to be

the appropriate level of allowance for credit losses. Management determines a reasonable and supportable
forecast based on the expectation of future conditions over a supportable forecast period as described above, as
well as qualitative adjustments based on current and future conditions that may not be fully captured in the
historical modeling factors described above. All of these estimates are susceptible to significant change.

Impact if actual results differ from assumptions and judgment: We monitor our collections and write-off
experience to assess whether or not adjustments to our allowance percentage estimates are necessary. Changes in
trends in any of the factors that we believe impact the collection of our student receivables, as noted above, or
modifications to our collection practices, and other related policies may impact our estimate of our allowance for
credit losses and our results from operations.

A one percentage point change in our allowance for credit losses as a percentage of gross earned student

receivables as of December 31, 2021 would have resulted in a change in pretax income from continuing
operations of $0.8 million during the year then ended.

Because a substantial portion of our revenue is derived from Title IV Programs, any legislative or regulatory

action that significantly reduces the funding available under Title IV Programs, or the ability of our students or
institutions to participate in Title IV Programs, would likely have a material impact on the realizability of our
receivables.

Goodwill Impairment

Description: Goodwill represents the excess of cost over the fair value of identifiable net assets of acquired

companies. Goodwill often involves estimates based on third party valuations, or internal valuations based on
discounted cash flow analyses or other valuation techniques. Under ASC Topic 350, we conduct a goodwill
impairment assessment at least annually, and more frequently if events occur or circumstances change that would
more-likely-than-not reduce the fair value of the goodwill on our balance sheet below its carrying amount. In
making this assessment we assess qualitative factors to determine whether it is more-likely-than-not the fair
value of the goodwill is less than its carrying amount. If we conclude based on the qualitative assessment that
goodwill may be impaired, we then perform a quantitative one-step impairment test, and an impairment loss
would be recognized for the excess of the carrying value over the fair value of the goodwill. Any subsequent
increases in goodwill would not be recognized on the consolidated financial statements.

Assumptions and judgment: During the current year, we performed a qualitative assessment for the annual

review of goodwill balances for impairment. Management first considered events and circumstances that may
affect the fair value of the reporting unit to determine whether it was necessary to perform the quantitative
impairment test. Management focused on the significant inputs utilized in the most recent quantitative
assessment and any events or circumstances that could affect the significant inputs, including, but not limited to,
financial performance compared with actual and projected results of relevant prior periods, legal, regulatory,
contractual, competitive, economic, political, business or other factors, and industry and market considerations,
such as a deteriorating operating environment or increased competition.

When performing a quantitative assessment for the annual review of goodwill balances for impairment, we
estimate the fair value of each of our reporting units based on projected future operating results and cash flows,
market assumptions and/or comparative market multiple methods. Determining fair value requires significant

61

estimates and assumptions based on an evaluation of a number of factors, such as marketplace participants,
relative market share, new student interest, student retention, future expansion or contraction expectations,
amount and timing of future cash flows and the discount rate applied to the cash flows. Projected future operating
results and cash flows used for valuation purposes do reflect improvements relative to recent historical periods
with respect to, among other things, modest revenue growth and operating margins. Although we believe our
projected future operating results and cash flows and related estimates regarding fair values are based on
reasonable assumptions, historically projected operating results and cash flows have not always been achieved.
The failure of one of our reporting units to achieve projected operating results and cash flows in the near term or
long term may reduce the estimated fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying value and result in the
recognition of a goodwill impairment charge. Significant management judgment is necessary to evaluate the
impact of operating and macroeconomic changes and to estimate future cash flows. Assumptions used in our
impairment evaluations, such as forecasted growth rates and our cost of capital, are based on the best available
market information and are consistent with our internal forecasts and operating plans. In addition to cash flow
estimates, our valuations are sensitive to the rate used to discount cash flows and future growth assumptions.
These assumptions could be adversely impacted by certain of the risks discussed in Item 1A, “Risk Factors,” in
this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

Impact if actual results differ from assumptions and judgment: Changes in these qualitative and quantitative
factors, as well as downturns in economic or business conditions, could have a significant adverse impact on the
fair value of our reporting units in relation to their respective carrying values of goodwill and could result in an
impairment loss affecting our consolidated financial statements as a whole. Generally, an impairment loss would
reduce our net income for the reporting period being presented, and proportionally reduce the value of the assets
and equity reflected on our balance sheet.

We did not record any goodwill impairment charges during the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020,
and have $162.6 million of goodwill as of December 31, 2021. The most recent quantitative fair value analysis
was performed as of October 1, 2020, which indicated that the fair values of our CTU and AIUS reporting units
exceeded their carrying values by $458.4 million and $116.7 million (fair value as a percentage of carrying value
for these reporting units of 904% and 229%), respectively. We performed a qualitative analysis as of October 1,
2021 to determine if any critical estimates or judgments were significantly different as compared to those utilized
in the 2020 quantitative analysis and determined a quantitative analysis was not required as of October 1, 2021.

Income Taxes

Description: We are subject to the income tax laws of the U.S. and various state and local jurisdictions.

These tax laws are complex and subject to interpretation. As a result, significant judgments and interpretations
are required in determining our income tax provisions (benefits) and evaluating our uncertain tax positions.

We account for income taxes in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 740 – Income Taxes. Topic 740 requires

the recognition of deferred income tax assets and liabilities based upon the income tax consequences of
temporary differences between financial reporting and income tax reporting by applying enacted statutory
income tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts and
the income tax basis of existing assets and liabilities. Topic 740 also requires that deferred income tax assets be
reduced by a valuation allowance if it is more likely than not that some portion of the deferred income tax asset
will not be realized.

Assumptions and judgment: In establishing a provision for income tax expense or a liability for an uncertain

tax position, we must make judgments and interpretations about the application of inherently complex tax laws.
We must also make estimates about when in the future certain items will affect taxable income in the various tax
jurisdictions. Disputes over interpretations of the tax laws may be subject to review/adjudication by the court
systems in the various tax jurisdictions or may be settled with the taxing authority upon examination or audit.

62

Impact if actual results differ from assumptions and judgment: Although we believe the judgments and
estimates used are reasonable, actual results could differ and we may be exposed to changes in tax liability that
could be material. To the extent we prevail in matters for which reserves have been established, or are required to
pay amounts in excess of our reserves, our effective income tax rate in a given financial statement period could
be materially affected. An unfavorable tax settlement would result in an increase in our effective income tax rate.

LIQUIDITY, FINANCIAL POSITION AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

As of December 31, 2021, cash, cash equivalents, restricted cash and available-for-sale short-term

investments (“cash balances”) totaled $499.4 million. Restricted cash as of December 31, 2021 was $5.2 million
and relates to amounts held in escrow accounts to secure post-closing indemnification obligations of the sellers
pursuant to the Trident and Hippo acquisitions. Our cash flows from operating activities have historically been
adequate to fulfill our liquidity requirements. We have historically financed our operating activities, organic
growth and acquisitions primarily through cash generated from operations and existing cash balances. We
generated cash in 2021 as a result of improved operating performance and reduced operating losses associated
with closed campuses and expect to continue to do so in 2022. We anticipate that we will be able to satisfy the
cash requirements associated with, among other things, our working capital needs, capital expenditures, lease
commitments and acquisitions through at least the next 12 months primarily with cash generated by operations
and existing cash balances.

On September 8, 2021, the Company and the subsidiary guarantors thereunder entered into a credit
agreement with Wintrust Bank N.A. (“Wintrust”), in its capacities as the sole lead arranger, sole bookrunner,
administrative agent and letter of credit issuer for the lenders from time to time parties thereto. The credit
agreement provides the Company with the benefit of a $125.0 million senior secured revolving credit facility.
The $125.0 million revolving credit facility under the credit agreement is scheduled to mature on September 8,
2024. So long as no default has occurred and other conditions have been met, the Company may request an
increase in the aggregate commitment in an amount not to exceed $50.0 million. The loans and letter of credit
obligations under the credit agreement are secured by substantially all assets of the Company and the subsidiary
guarantors.

The credit agreement and the ancillary documents executed in connection therewith contain customary

affirmative, negative and financial maintenance covenants. The Company is required to maintain unrestricted
cash, cash equivalents and short-term investments in domestic accounts in an amount at least equal to the
aggregate loan commitments then in effect. Acquisitions to be undertaken by the Company must meet certain
criteria, and the Company’s ability to make restricted payments, including payments in connection with a
repurchase of shares of our common stock, is subject to an aggregate maximum of $100.0 million per fiscal year.
Upon the occurrence of certain regulatory events or if the Company’s unrestricted cash, cash equivalents and
short term investments are less than 125% of the aggregate amount of the loan commitments then in effect, the
Company is required to maintain cash in a segregated, restricted account in an amount not less than the aggregate
loan commitments then in effect. The credit agreement also contains customary representations and warranties,
events of default, and rights and remedies upon the occurrence of any event of default thereunder, including
rights to accelerate the loans, terminate the commitments and realize upon the collateral securing the obligations
under the credit agreement.

The credit agreement with Wintrust replaced the previous $50.0 million revolving credit facility set forth in

the credit agreement dated as of December 27, 2018 with BMO Harris Bank N.A. As of December 31, 2021,
there were no amounts outstanding under the revolving credit facility.

We maintain a balanced capital allocation strategy that focuses on maintaining a strong balance sheet and

adequate liquidity, while (i) investing in organic projects at our universities, in particular technology-related
initiatives which are designed to benefit our students, and (ii) evaluating diverse strategies to enhance
stockholder value, including acquisitions of quality educational institutions or programs and share repurchases.

63

We completed two acquisitions with a combined initial cash consideration of approximately $57.1 million during
the year ended December 31, 2021 and are pursuing additional acquisition opportunities similar in size to these
two. We currently anticipate that we will complete another acquisition by the end of 2022. Ultimately, our goal is
to deploy resources in a way that drives long term stockholder value while supporting and enhancing the
academic value of our institutions.

On November 4, 2019, the Board of Directors of the Company approved a stock repurchase program which
authorizes the Company to repurchase up to $50.0 million of our common stock from time to time depending on
market conditions and other considerations. The program’s original expiration date was December 31, 2021. On
October 19, 2021, the Board of Directors of the Company extended the expiration date of the program to
February 28, 2022. On January 27, 2022 the Board of Directors of the Company approved a new stock
repurchase program for up to $50.0 million which commences March 1, 2022 and expires September 30, 2023.
Share repurchases will remain a part of our capital allocation strategy and we intend to pursue them when
deemed appropriate based on market and other conditions. Since the November 4, 2019 inception date, the
Company repurchased approximately 3.9 million shares for $47.1 million as of December 31, 2021.

The discussion above reflects management’s expectations regarding liquidity; however, as a result of the
significance of the Title IV Program funds received by our students, we are highly dependent on these funds to
operate our business. Any reduction in the level of Title IV funds that our students are eligible to receive or any
impact on timing or our ability to receive Title IV Program funds, or any requirement to post a significant letter
of credit to the Department, may have a significant impact on our operations and our financial condition. In
addition, our financial performance is dependent on the level of student enrollments which could be impacted by
external factors. See Item 1A, “Risk Factors.”

Sources and Uses of Cash

Operating Cash Flows

During the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020, net cash flows provided by operating activities totaled

$191.1 million and $180.0 million, respectively. The increase in cash flow from operations as compared to the
prior year is primarily driven by the improvement in operating income during the current year.

Our primary source of cash flows from operating activities is tuition collected from our students. Our
students derive the ability to pay tuition costs through the use of a variety of funding sources, including, among
others, federal loan and grant programs, state grant programs, private loans and grants, institutional payment
plans, private and institutional scholarships and cash payments, as well as private loans for our non-degree
programs. For the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020, approximately 81% and 80% of our institutions’
aggregate cash receipts from tuition payments came from Title IV Program funding. This percentage differs from
the Title IV Program percentage calculated under the 90-10 Rule due to the treatment of certain funding types
and certain student level limitations on what and how much to count as prescribed under the rule.

For further discussion of Title IV Program funding and other funding sources for our students, see Item 1,

“Business—Student Financial Aid and Related Federal Regulation.”

Our primary uses of cash to support our operating activities include, among other things, cash paid and
benefits provided to our employees for services, to vendors for products and services, to lessors for rents and
operating costs related to leased facilities, to suppliers for textbooks and other institution supplies, and to federal,
state and local governments for income and other taxes.

Investing Cash Flows

During the year ended December 31, 2021, net cash flows provided by investing activities totaled
$54.3 million compared to net cash flows used in investing activities of $165.9 million for the year ended
December 31, 2020.

64

Purchases and Sales of Available-for-Sale Investments. Purchases and sales of available-for-sale

investments resulted in a net cash inflow of $121.9 million for the current year as compared to net cash outflow
of $116.4 million for the prior year.

Business acquisitions. For the year ended December 31, 2021, the Company completed the DigitalCrafts
and Hippo acquisitions and made initial payments of $57.1 million. The year ended December 31, 2020 includes
$39.8 million for payments related to the Trident acquisition.

Capital Expenditures. Capital expenditures increased to $10.5 million for the year ended December 31,

2021 as compared to $9.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2020. Capital expenditures represented
approximately 1.5% and 1.4% of revenue for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively. For the
year ending December 31, 2022, we expect capital expenditures to be approximately 2.0% of revenue.

Financing Cash Flows

During the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020, net cash flows used in financing activities totaled

$29.9 million and $13.1 million, respectively.

Payments of employee tax associated with stock compensation. Payments of employee tax associated with

stock compensation were $5.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2021 and $0.9 million for the year ended
December 31, 2020.

Repurchase of Stock. During the year ended December 31, 2021, we repurchased 2.3 million shares of our

common stock for approximately $25.3 million at an average price of $10.94 per share as compared to
1.3 million shares of common stock repurchased for $17.9 million at an average price of $13.53 per share for the
year ended December 31, 2020. Repurchases of stock during 2021 and 2020 were funded by cash generated from
operating activities and existing cash balances. See Part II, Item 5 for more information.

Contractual Obligations

As of December 31, 2021, future minimum cash payments due under contractual obligations for our
non-cancelable operating lease arrangements were $52.8 million, with approximately $11.5 million due within
the next 12 months. These future minimum cash payments reflect base rent and other fixed lease-related costs
identified in the lease agreements but excludes variable costs such as common area maintenance payments and
taxes, as these amounts are undeterminable at this time and may vary based on future circumstances. We lease
most of our administrative and educational facilities under non-cancelable operating leases expiring at various
dates through 2032. Lease terms generally range from one to ten years with one to four renewal options for
extended terms.

As of December 31, 2021, we were not a party to any off-balance sheet financing or contingent payment

arrangements, nor do we have any unconsolidated subsidiaries.

65

Changes in Financial Position – December 31, 2021 compared to December 31, 2020

Selected consolidated balance sheet account changes from December 31, 2020 to December 31, 2021 were

as follows (dollars in thousands):

As of December 31,

2021

2020

%
Change

CURRENT ASSETS:

ASSETS

Total cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash

and short-term investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 499,391

$ 410,360

22%

NON-CURRENT ASSETS:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right of use asset, net
Goodwill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intangible assets, net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred income tax assets, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’

EQUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CURRENT LIABILITIES:

36,664
162,579
32,208
25,114

44,773
118,312
15,522
40,351

-18%
37%
107%
-38%

Accrued expenses—other
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15,180
70,613

11,921
34,534

27%
104%

STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Treasury stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(276,895)

(246,088)

13%

Total cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash and short-term investments: The increase is primarily
driven by cash provided by operating activities, partially offset with payments made for business acquisitions and
share repurchases during the current year.

Right of use asset, net: The decrease is attributable to the reduction of future leased space, particularly

associated with our campus support center relocation.

Goodwill: The increase in goodwill is attributable to the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions.

Intangible assets, net: The increase in intangible assets is attributable to the DigitalCrafts and Hippo

acquisitions.

Deferred income tax assets, net: The decrease reflects the usage of deferred tax assets associated with the

offset of income taxes payable.

Accrued expenses other: The increase is primarily related to the reclassification of $4.0 million of escrow

liability related to the Trident acquisition from long term to short term.

Deferred revenue: The increase is primarily related to the timing of the academic calendar redesign at CTU

as well as the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions during the current year.

Treasury stock: The increase is driven primarily by the repurchase of the Company’s common stock during

the current year for approximately $25.3 million.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

See Note 4 “Recent Accounting Pronouncements” to our consolidated financial statements for a discussion

of recent accounting pronouncements that may affect us.

66

ITEM 7A. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

We are exposed to financial market risks, primarily changes in interest rates. We use various techniques to
manage our interest rate risk. We have no derivative financial instruments or derivative commodity instruments,
and believe the risk related to cash equivalents and available for sale investments is limited due to the adherence
to our investment policy, which focuses on capital preservation and liquidity. In addition, we use asset managers
who conduct initial and ongoing credit analysis on our investment portfolio and monitor that investments are in
compliance with our investment policy. Despite the investment risk mitigation strategies we employ, we may
incur investment losses as a result of unusual and unpredictable market developments and may experience
reduced investment earnings if the yields on investments deemed to be low risk remain low or decline.

Interest Rate Exposure

Our future investment income may fall short of expectations due to changes in interest rates or we may
suffer losses in principal if we are forced to sell investments that have declined in market value due to changes in
interest rates. At December 31, 2021, a 10% increase or decrease in interest rates applicable to our investments or
borrowings would not have a material impact on our future earnings, fair values or cash flows.

Under the credit agreement, outstanding principal amounts bear annual interest at a fluctuating rate equal to
1.0% less than the administrative agent’s prime commercial rate, subject to a 3.0% minimum rate. A higher rate
may apply to late payments or if any event of default exists. As of December 31, 2021, we had no outstanding
borrowings under this facility.

Our financial instruments are recorded at their fair values as of December 31, 2021 and December 31, 2020.

We believe that the exposure of our consolidated financial position and results of operations and cash flows to
adverse changes in interest rates applicable to our investments or borrowings is not significant.

ITEM 8.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

The financial information required by Item 8 is contained in Part IV, Item 15 of this Annual Report on

Form 10-K.

ITEM 9. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND

FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

None.

ITEM 9A. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Evaluation of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

We completed an evaluation as of the end of the period covered by this Annual Report on Form 10-K
(“Report”) under the supervision and with the participation of management, including our Chief Executive
Officer and Chief Financial Officer, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls
and procedures pursuant to Rule 13a-15(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange
Act”). Based upon that evaluation, our Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that, as of
December 31, 2021, our disclosure controls and procedures were effective to provide reasonable assurance that
(i) the information required to be disclosed by us in this Report was recorded, processed, summarized and
reported within the time periods specified in the rules and forms provided by the U.S. Securities and Exchange
Commission (“SEC”), and (ii) information required to be disclosed by us in our reports that we file or submit
under the Exchange Act is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our principal executive
and principal financial officers, or persons performing similar functions, as appropriate to allow timely decisions
regarding required disclosure.

67

Scope of Management’s Report on Internal Controls over Financial Reporting

Management excluded the acquisitions of DigitalCrafts and Hippo Education in its evaluation of the

effectiveness of the design and operation of our disclosure controls and procedures pursuant to Rule 13a-15(b) of
the Exchange Act. DigitalCrafts and Hippo Education were not material to consolidated results of operations for
the year ended December 31, 2021 and were each less than 1% of total revenues for the year ended December 31,
2021. Additionally, DigitalCrafts and Hippo Education were approximately 2.5% and 5.8% of total assets,
respectively, as of December 31, 2021.

Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting

There were no changes in our internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the quarter ended

December 31, 2021, that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal
control over financial reporting.

Inherent Limitations on the Effectiveness of Controls

Our management does not expect that our disclosure controls and procedures or our internal controls will

prevent or detect all errors and all fraud. A control system, no matter how well conceived and operated, can
provide only reasonable, not absolute, assurance that the objectives of the control system are met. Further, the
design of a control system must reflect the fact that there are resource constraints, and the benefits of controls
must be considered relative to their costs. Because of the inherent limitations in a cost-effective control system,
no evaluation of controls can provide absolute assurance that misstatements due to error or fraud will not occur
or that all control issues and instances of fraud, if any, within our Company have been detected.

These inherent limitations include the realities that judgments in decision-making can be faulty and that

breakdowns can occur because of simple error or mistake. Controls can also be circumvented by the individual
acts of some persons, by collusion of two or more people, or by management override of the controls. The design
of any system of controls is based in part on certain assumptions about the likelihood of future events, and there
can be no assurance that any design will succeed in achieving its stated goals under all potential future
conditions. Projections of any evaluation of controls effectiveness to future periods are subject to risks. Over
time, controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions or deterioration in the degree of
compliance with policies or procedures.

Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

Our management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial
reporting as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) under the Exchange Act to provide reasonable assurance regarding the
reliability of our financial reporting and the preparation of the financial statements for external purposes in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

Based upon the evaluation under the framework contained in the 2013 Committee of Sponsoring

Organizations of the Treadway Commission Report, management concluded that, as of December 31, 2021, our
internal control over financial reporting was effective.

Grant Thornton LLP, our independent registered public accounting firm, who audited and reported on the

consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2021 included in this Annual Report on Form
10-K, has issued a report on the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting. This attestation
report is included on page 62 of this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

ITEM 9B. OTHER INFORMATION

On January 27, 2022 the Board of Directors of the Company approved a new stock repurchase program for
up to $50.0 million which commences March 1, 2022 and expires September 30, 2023. The timing of purchases

68

and the number of shares repurchased under the program will be determined by the Company’s management and
will depend on a variety of factors including stock price, trading volume and other general market and economic
conditions, its assessment of alternative uses of capital, regulatory requirements and other factors. Repurchases
will be made in open market transactions, including block purchases, conducted in accordance with Rule 10b-18
under the Exchange Act as well as may be made pursuant to trading plans established under Rule 10b5-1 under
the Exchange Act, which would permit shares to be repurchased when the Company might otherwise be
precluded from doing so under insider trading laws. The stock repurchase program does not obligate the
Company to purchase shares and the Company may, in its discretion, begin, suspend or terminate repurchases at
any time, without any prior notice.

On February 21, 2022, the Board approved the appointment of Greg E. Jansen, currently the Company’s
Vice President and Deputy General Counsel, to the positions of Senior Vice President, General Counsel and
Corporate Secretary effective on March 16, 2022 (the “Transition Date”). Mr. Jansen joined the Company in
2005. On the same date, the Board approved the resignation of Jeffrey D. Ayers from the positions of Senior
Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary effective on the Transition Date. The Company and
Mr. Ayers have mutually agreed that on the Transition Date, Mr. Ayers will transition to the role of Senior
Counsel, and he will assist Mr. Jansen in his transition until Mr. Ayers’ retirement from the Company.

The Company entered into a letter agreement with Mr. Ayers dated February 21, 2022 (the “Ayers Letter
Agreement”), pursuant to which Mr. Ayers will remain employed by the Company as Senior Counsel from the
Transition Date until the date that is the earlier of the date that the Company notifies him that his services are no
longer needed or June 30, 2023 (the “Retirement Date”). Pursuant to the Ayers Letter Agreement, Mr. Ayers will
continue to receive an annual base salary of $387,600, and he will be entitled to receive his annual incentive
payment for 2021 and 2022 pursuant to the Company’s Annual Incentive Award Program. He will not be entitled
to receive long-term incentive awards after the date of the Ayers Letter Agreement. In addition, the
Compensation Committee has determined that on the Retirement Date, Mr. Ayers will be entitled to severance in
the amount he would have been entitled to receive under the Company’s Executive Severance Plan in effect as of
the date of the Ayers Letter Agreement, provided that he remains employed with the Company through the
Retirement Date and his termination is not for cause (as defined in the Ayers Letter Agreement).

The foregoing description of the terms of the Ayers Letter Agreement is a summary which does not purport

to be complete and is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to the Ayers Letter Agreement, a copy
of which is filed herewith as Exhibit 10.21 to this Annual Report on Form 10-K and is incorporated by reference
into this Item 9B.

ITEM 9C. DISCLOSURE REGARDING FOREIGN JURISDICTIONS THAT PREVENT

INSPECTIONS

None.

69

ITEM 10. DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Below is a list of our Executive Officers and Board of Directors as of February 24, 2022:

PART III

Executive Officers:
Andrew H. Hurst
President and Chief Executive Officer

Board of Directors:
Todd S. Nelson—Executive Chairman of the Board
Former President and Chief Executive Officer of
Perdoceo Education Corporation

Ashish R. Ghia
Senior Vice President and Chief Financial
Officer

Thomas B. Lally—Lead Independent Director
Former President of Heller Equity Capital
Corporation

Jeffrey D. Ayers
Senior Vice President, General Counsel and
Corporate Secretary

Dennis H. Chookaszian
Former Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of
CNA Financial Corporation

Elise L. Baskel
Senior Vice President—Colorado Technical
University

Kenda B. Gonzales
Former Chief Financial Officer of Harrison
Properties, LLC

David C. Czeszewski
Senior Vice President and Chief Information
Officer

Patrick W. Gross
Chairman of the Lovell Group

John R. Kline
Senior Vice President—American
InterContinental University

William D. Hansen
Former Chief Executive Officer and President of
Strada Education Network

Michele A. Peppers
Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer

Andrew H. Hurst
President and Chief Executive Officer of
Perdoceo Education Corporation

Gregory L. Jackson
Private Investor

Leslie T. Thornton
Former Senior Vice President, General Counsel
and Corporate Secretary of WGL Holdings, Inc.
and Washington Gas

Alan D. Wheat
Chair of Wheat Shroyer Government Relations

The other information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy

Statement to be filed in connection with our 2022 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

ITEM 11. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement

to be filed in connection with our 2022 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

70

ITEM 12. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

Certain of the information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy

Statement to be filed in connection with our 2022 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

The following table provides information as of December 31, 2021, with respect to shares of our common

stock that may be issued under our existing equity compensation plans:

EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN INFORMATION

(a)

(b)

(c)

Plan Category

Equity compensation plans approved
by stockholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Number of shares to be
issued upon exercise of
outstanding options

Weighted-average exercise
price of outstanding options

Number of shares
remaining available for
future issuances under
equity compensation
plans (excluding
securities reflected in
column (a))

995,091(1)

995,091

$9.02

$9.02

7,019,463(2)

7,019,463

(1)

(2)

Includes outstanding options to purchase shares of our common stock under the Company’s 2008 Incentive
Compensation Plan (the “2008 Plan”) and Amended and Restated 2016 Incentive Compensation Plan (the
“2016 Plan”).
Includes shares available for future issuance under the 2016 Plan in addition to the number of shares
issuable upon exercise of outstanding options referenced in column (a). In addition to stock options, the
2016 Plan provides for the issuance of stock appreciation rights, restricted stock and units, deferred stock,
dividend equivalents, other stock-based awards, performance awards and units, or cash incentive awards.
The amount in column (c) is net of 2.0 million shares underlying restricted stock units outstanding as of
December 31, 2021, which will be settled in shares of our common stock if the vesting conditions are met
and thus reduce the common stock available for future share-based awards under the 2016 Plan by the
amount vested. These shares have been multiplied by the applicable factor under the 2016 Plan to determine
the remaining shares available as of December 31, 2021. Additionally, there were less than 0.1 million
shares underlying deferred stock units outstanding under the previous 2008 Plan which will be settled in
shares of our common stock if the vesting conditions are met and do not affect the number of shares
reflected in column (c) above.

See Note 14 “Share-Based Compensation” to our consolidated financial statements for more information

regarding the Company’s share-based compensation.

ITEM 13. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS, AND DIRECTOR

INDEPENDENCE

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement

to be filed in connection with our 2022 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

ITEM 14. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

The information required by this item is incorporated herein by reference to our definitive Proxy Statement

to be filed in connection with our 2022 Annual Meeting of Stockholders.

71

ITEM 15. EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

1. Financial Statements

PART IV

The financial statements listed in the Index to Financial Statements on page 59 are filed as part of this

Annual Report.

2. Financial Statement Schedules

The financial statement schedule listed in the Index to Financial Statements on page 59 is filed as part of
this Annual Report. All other schedules have been omitted because the required information is included in the
consolidated financial statements or notes thereto or because they are not applicable or not required.

3. Exhibits

The exhibits listed in the Index to Exhibits on pages 55 - 57 are filed as part of this Annual Report.

ITEM 16. FORM 10-K SUMMARY

None.

72

Exhibit
Number

2.1

2.2

3.1

3.2

4.1

4.2

4.3

INDEX TO EXHIBITS

Exhibit

Incorporated by Reference to:

Asset Purchase Agreement dated March 8,
2019 among Trident University International,
LLC, TUI Learning, LLC, Athena NewCo,
LLC and Career Education Corporation

First Amendment to Asset Purchase Agreement
effective February 4, 2020 among Trident
University International, LLC, TUI Learning,
LLC, Athena NewCo, LLC and Perdoceo
Education Corporation

Restated Certificate of Incorporation of
Perdoceo Education Corporation (originally
incorporated on January 5, 1994)

Seventh Amended and Restated By-laws of
Perdoceo Education Corporation effective
January 1, 2020

Exhibit 2.1 to our Form 8-K filed on March 12,
2019

Exhibit 2.2 to our Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 2019

Exhibit 3.2 to our Form 8-K filed on
December 18, 2019

Exhibit 3.3 to our Form 8-K filed on
December 18, 2019

Form of specimen stock certificate representing
Common Stock

Exhibit 4.1 to our Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 2019

Description of Common Stock

Credit Agreement dated as of September 8,
2021 among Perdoceo Education Corporation,
the subsidiary guarantors from time to time
parties thereto, the lenders from time to time
parties thereto, and Wintrust Bank, N.A, as
administrative agent and letter of credit issuer

Exhibit 4.2 to our Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 2019

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on
September 13, 2021

*10.1

Career Education Corporation 2008 Incentive
Compensation Plan (“2008 Plan”)

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on May 16,
2008

*10.2

First Amendment to the 2008 Plan

Perdoceo Education Corporation Amended and
Restated 2016 Incentive Compensation Plan
(“2016 Plan”)

Exhibit 10.30 to our Form 10-K for the year
ended December 31, 2008

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on June 8,
2021

2021 Annual Incentive Award Program
pursuant to the 2016 Plan

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on March 9,
2021

Form of Non-Employee Director Option Grant
Agreement under the 2008 Plan

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended June 30, 2011

Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option
Agreement under the 2008 Plan

Exhibit 10.3 to our Form 8-K filed on
February 27, 2009

Form of Employee Non-Qualified Stock
Option Agreement under the 2008 Plan

Exhibit 10.2 to our Form 8-K filed on March 6,
2012

73

*10.3

*10.4

*10.5

*10.6

*10.7

Exhibit
Number

*10.8

*10.9

*10.10

*10.11

*10.12

*10.13

*10.14

*10.15

*10.16

*10.17

*10.18

*10.19

*10.20

Exhibit

Incorporated by Reference to:

Form of Employee Non-Qualified Stock
Option Agreement under the 2008 Plan (used
for awards in 2013)

Form of Employee Non-Qualified Stock
Option Agreement under the 2008 Plan (Time-
Based) (used for awards commencing in 2014)

Form of Employee Non-Qualified Stock
Option Agreement under the 2016 Plan (Time-
Based) (used for awards commencing in May
2016)

Form of Non-Employee Director Option Grant
Agreement under the 2008 Plan (used for
awards commencing May 2015)

Form of Non-Employee Director
Non-Qualified Stock Option Agreement under
the 2016 Plan (used for awards commencing
May 2016)

Exhibit 10.3 to our Form 8-K filed on March 8,
2013

Exhibit 10.2 to our Form 8-K filed on
March 10, 2014

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Exhibit 10.4 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended June 30, 2015

Exhibit 10.2 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Form of Non-Employee Director Deferred
Stock Unit Agreement under the 2008 Plan

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended June 30, 2014

Form of Employee Restricted Stock Unit
Award Agreement under the 2016 Plan (Time-
Based) (used for awards commencing in May
2016)

Form of Employee Restricted Stock Unit
Award Agreement under the 2016 Plan
(Performance-Based) (used for awards
commencing in May 2016)

Form of Non-Employee Director Restricted
Stock Unit Award Agreement under the 2016
Plan (used for awards commencing May 2020)

Form of Employee Cash-Settled Restricted
Stock Unit Award Agreement under the 2016
Plan (Time-Based) (used for awards
commencing in May 2016)

Form of Employee Cash-Settled Restricted
Stock Unit Award Agreement under the 2016
Plan (Performance-Based) (used for awards
commencing in May 2016)

Form of Performance Unit Award Agreement
under the 2016 Plan (used for awards
commencing in March 2017)

Amended and Restated Letter Agreement
between Perdoceo Education Corporation and
Todd Nelson dated January 19, 2022

74

Exhibit 10.3 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Exhibit 10.4 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on June 1,
2020

Exhibit 10.5 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Exhibit 10.6 to our Form 8-K filed on May 27,
2016

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on
March 10, 2017

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 8-K filed on
January 20, 2022

Exhibit
Number

*+10.21

*10.22

*10.23

*10.24

10.25

10.26

+21

+23.1

+31.1

+31.2

+32.1

+32.2

+101.INS

+101.SCH

+101.CAL

+101.DEF

+101.LAB

Exhibit

Incorporated by Reference to:

Letter Agreement between Perdoceo Education
Corporation and Jeffrey Ayers dated
February 21, 2022

Form of Indemnification Agreement for
Directors and Executive Officers

Exhibit 10.9 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended June 30, 2016

Exhibit 10.9 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended September 30, 2015

Exhibit 10.2 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended June 30, 2020

Exhibit 10.2 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended March 31, 2019

Exhibit 10.1 to our Form 10-Q for the period
ended September 30, 2019

Career Education Corporation Executive
Severance Plan (Amended and Restated as of
November 2, 2015)

First Amendment and Summary of Material
Modifications to the Career Education
Corporation Executive Severance Plan &
Summary Plan Description

Agreement with the Attorney General of Iowa
effective January 2, 2019, including schedule
of substantially identical agreements with the
attorneys general of other states

Stipulated Order for Permanent Injunction and
Monetary Judgment dated October 9, 2019
agreed to by the Federal Trade Commission
and Career Education Corporation and certain
of its subsidiaries

Subsidiaries of the Company

Consent of Grant Thornton LLP

Certification of CEO Pursuant to Section 302
of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

Certification of CFO Pursuant to Section 302
of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

Certification of CEO Pursuant to Section 906
of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

Certification of CFO Pursuant to Section 906
of Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

InLine XBRL Instance Document – the
instance document does not appear in the
Interactive Data File because its XBRL tags are
embedded within the InLine XBRL document

InLine XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema
Document

InLine XBRL Taxonomy Extension
Calculation Linkbase Document

InLine XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition
Linkbase Document

InLine XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label
Linkbase Document

75

Exhibit
Number

+101.PRE

+104

Exhibit

Incorporated by Reference to:

InLine XBRL Taxonomy Extension
Presentation Linkbase Document

The cover page from the Company’s Annual
Report on Form 10-K for the year ended
December 31, 2021, formatted in Inline XBRL
(included in Exhibit 101)

* Management contract or compensatory plan or arrangement required to be filed as an Exhibit to this Form

10-K.

+ Filed herewith.

76

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the
registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly
authorized, on the 24th day of February, 2022.

SIGNATURES

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION

By:

/S/ ASHISH R. GHIA
Ashish R. Ghia,
Senior Vice President and Chief Financial
Officer

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed
below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature

Title

Date

/s/ ANDREW H. HURST
Andrew H. Hurst

/s/ ASHISH R. GHIA
Ashish R. Ghia

Director, President and Chief Executive

Officer

(Principal Executive Officer)

Senior Vice President and Chief Financial

Officer

(Principal Financial Officer)

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

/s/ MICHELE A. PEPPERS
Michele A. Peppers

Vice President and Chief Accounting Officer
(Principal Accounting Officer)

February 24, 2022

/s/ TODD S. NELSON
Todd S. Nelson

/s/ THOMAS B. LALLY
Thomas B. Lally

/s/ DENNIS H. CHOOKASZIAN
Dennis H. Chookaszian

/s/ KENDA B. GONZALES
Kenda B. Gonzales

/s/ PATRICK W. GROSS
Patrick W. Gross

/s/ WILLIAM D. HANSEN
William D. Hansen

/s/ GREGORY L. JACKSON
Gregory L. Jackson

/s/ LESLIE T. THORNTON
Leslie T. Thornton

/s/ ALAN D. WHEAT
Alan D. Wheat

Executive Chairman of the Board

February 24, 2022

Lead Independent Director

February 24, 2022

Director

Director

Director

Director

Director

Director

Director

77

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

February 24, 2022

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Financial Statements
Reports of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm (PCAOB ID Number 248) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Statements of Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income for the Years Ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and

2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Consolidated Statements of Stockholders’ Equity for the Years Ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and

2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 . . . . . . . .
Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Financial Statement Schedule
Schedule II – Valuation and Qualifying Accounts

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

79
83
84

84

85
86
87

122

All other financial statement schedules are omitted because they are not applicable or the required information
is shown in the consolidated financial statements or related notes.

78

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Board of Directors and Stockholders
Perdoceo Education Corporation

Opinion on the financial statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Perdoceo Education Corporation (a Delaware
corporation) and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, the related consolidated
statements of income and comprehensive income, changes in stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the
three years in the period ended December 31, 2021, and the related notes and schedule (collectively referred to as
the “financial statements”). In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the
financial position of the Company as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, and the results of its operations and its
cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2021, in conformity with accounting
principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board
(United States) (“PCAOB”), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2021,
based on criteria established in the 2013 Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of
Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (“COSO”), and our report dated February 24, 2022
expressed an unqualified opinion.

Basis for opinion

These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express
an opinion on the Company’s financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm
registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with
the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange
Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan
and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of
material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that
respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and
disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and
significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial
statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

Critical audit matters

The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the financial
statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that: (1) relate to
accounts or disclosures that are material to the financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging,
subjective, or complex judgments. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our
opinion on the financial statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters
below, providing separate opinions on the critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they
relate.

Allowance for Credit Losses

As described further in Notes 2 and 7 to the financial statements, student receivables represent funds owed to the
Company in exchange for the educational services provided to the student. Student receivables are reported net of

79

an allowance for credit losses as determined by management at the end of each reporting period. Generally, a
student receivable balance is written off once a student is out of school and it reaches greater than 90 days past
due.

Management’s student receivable allowance is based on an estimate of lifetime expected credit losses for student
receivables. Its estimation methodology considers a number of quantitative and qualitative factors that, based on
collection experience, have an impact on repayment risk and ability to collect student receivables. Changes in the
trends in any of these factors may impact the estimate of the allowance for credit losses. The factors include, but
are not limited to repayment history, changes in the current economic, legislative or regulatory environments,
cash collection forecasts and the ability to complete the federal financial aid process with the student. These
factors are monitored and assessed on a regular basis. Overall, the allowance estimation process for student
receivables is assessed by comparing estimated and actual performance.

Our audit procedures related to the allowance for credit losses included the following, among others:

• Assessed the appropriateness of management’s methodology for calculating the allowance including
the significant inputs and assumptions utilized, including any changes in the current economic,
legislative or regulatory environments, cash collection forecasts and the ability to complete the federal
financial aid process with the student,

• Recalculated the estimated allowance rates applied to the respective accounts receivable allowance

categories determined according to funding sources and other criteria,

• Tested the completeness and accuracy of data underlying management’s assertions and calculations for

a selection of students, and compared our recalculations to management’s analysis to determine
whether management’s conclusions were reasonable, and

• Tested on a sample basis the write-offs, the rates of reserve percentages, and subsequent cash

collections on a student account.

In addition, we tested the design and operating effectiveness of controls relating to establishing the allowance for
credit losses.

/s/ GRANT THORNTON LLP

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2015.

Chicago, Illinois
February 24, 2022

80

REPORT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Board of Directors and Stockholders
Perdoceo Education Corporation

Opinion on internal control over financial reporting

We have audited the internal control over financial reporting of Perdoceo Education Corporation (a Delaware
corporation) and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of December 31, 2021, based on criteria established in the
2013 Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the
Treadway Commission (“COSO”). In our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective
internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2021, based on criteria established in the 2013
Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by COSO.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United
States) (“PCAOB”), the consolidated financial statements of the Company as of and for the year ended December 31,
2021, and our report dated February 24, 2022 expressed an unqualified opinion on those financial statements.

Basis for opinion

The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for
its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying
Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the
Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered
with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal
securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan
and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial
reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal
control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, testing and evaluating the
design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk, and performing such other
procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable
basis for our opinion.

Our audit of, and opinion on, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting does not include the
internal control over financial reporting of DigitalCrafts and Hippo Education, LLC, wholly-owned subsidiaries,
whose financial statements reflect total assets constituting 2.5% and 5.8%, respectively, and revenues were each
less than 1%, of the related consolidated financial statement amounts as of and for the year ended December 31,
2021. As indicated in Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting, DigitalCrafts and
Hippo Education, LLC were acquired during 2021. Management’s assertion on the effectiveness of the
Company’s internal control over financial reporting excluded internal control over financial reporting of
DigitalCrafts and Hippo Education, LLC.

Definition and limitations of internal control over financial reporting

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance
regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting
includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail,
accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company; (2) provide
reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the Company are
being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the Company; and
(3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or
disposition of the Company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

81

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect
misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that
controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the
policies or procedures may deteriorate.

/s/ GRANT THORNTON LLP

Chicago, Illinois
February 24, 2022

82

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(In thousands, except share and per share amounts)

As of December 31,

2021

2020

CURRENT ASSETS:

ASSETS

Cash and cash equivalents, unrestricted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 319,982
5,196

$ 105,684
4,000

Total cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Short-term investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash and short-term investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Student receivables, gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowance for credit losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Student receivables, net

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receivables, other
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prepaid expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inventories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

325,178
174,213

499,391
79,418
(36,385)

43,033
1,692
6,919
904
2,514

109,684
300,676

410,360
84,599
(39,917)

44,682
2,873
8,209
596
341

Total current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

554,453

467,061

NON-CURRENT ASSETS:

Property and equipment, net of accumulated depreciation of $113,711 and $101,380 as of December 31, 2021
and 2020, respectively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right of use asset, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Goodwill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intangible assets, net of amortization of $8,662 and $4,178 as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively . .
Student receivables, gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowance for credit losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Student receivables, net

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred income tax assets, net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28,355
36,664
162,579
32,208
4,242
(2,870)

1,372
25,114
6,688

27,761
44,773
118,312
15,522
3,533
(2,230)

1,303
40,351
6,434

TOTAL ASSETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 847,433

$ 721,517

CURRENT LIABILITIES:

LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY

Lease liability-operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accrued expenses:

Payroll and related benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advertising and marketing costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$

9,400
10,838

$

9,789
13,259

25,312
8,690
211
15,180
70,613

22,661
10,249
1,402
11,921
34,534

Total current liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

140,244

103,815

NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES:

Lease liability-operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total non-current liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35,549
21,530

57,079

43,405
18,390

61,795

STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY:

Preferred stock, $0.01 par value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; none issued or outstanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common stock, $0.01 par value; 300,000,000 shares authorized; 88,724,438 and 87,264,910 shares issued,

68,748,662 and 70,062,364 shares outstanding as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively . . . . . . . . . .
Additional paid-in capital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accumulated other comprehensive (loss) income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained earnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treasury stock, at cost, 19,975,776 and 17,202,546 shares as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively . . .

—

—

887
674,242
(96)
251,972
(276,895)

873
658,423
364
142,335
(246,088)

Total stockholders’ equity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

650,110

555,907

TOTAL LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 847,433

$ 721,517

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

83

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
(In thousands, except per share amounts)

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

REVENUE:

Tuition and fees, net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$688,415
4,619

$684,579
2,735

$625,056
2,648

Total revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

693,034

687,314

627,704

OPERATING EXPENSES:

Educational services and facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General and administrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depreciation and amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Asset impairment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108,743
418,509
16,766
—

111,768
417,214
14,786
612

101,944
430,153
9,145
—

Total operating expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

544,018

544,380

541,242

Operating income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149,016

142,934

86,462

OTHER INCOME:

Interest income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interest expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total other income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PRETAX INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Provision for income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INCOME FROM CONTINUING OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOSS FROM DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS, net of tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

930
(920)
58

68

3,852
(167)
211

3,896

149,084
39,430

109,654
(17)

146,830
22,476

124,354
(90)

6,392
(167)
335

6,560

93,022
22,428

70,594
(612)

NET INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$109,637

$124,264

$ 69,982

NET INCOME PER SHARE – BASIC:

Income from continuing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss from discontinued operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Net income per share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NET INCOME PER SHARE – DILUTED:

Income from continuing operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss from discontinued operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Net income per share . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

WEIGHTED AVERAGE SHARES OUTSTANDING:

Basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Diluted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$

$

$

$

1.57
—

1.57

1.55
—

1.55

$

$

$

$

1.79
—

1.79

1.74
—

1.74

$

$

$

$

1.01
(0.01)

1.00

0.98
(0.01)

0.97

70,024

70,881

69,414

71,265

70,088

72,085

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

(In Thousands)

NET INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OTHER COMPREHENSIVE (LOSS) INCOME, net of tax:

Foreign currency translation adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unrealized (loss) gain on investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total other comprehensive (loss) income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For the Year Ended
December 31,

2021

2020

2019

$109,637

$124,264

$69,982

(177)
(283)

(460)

199
(179)

20

(41)
683

642

COMPREHENSIVE INCOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$109,177

$124,284

$70,624

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

84

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY
(In thousands)

Common Stock

Treasury Stock

Issued
Shares

$0.01 Par
Value

Purchased
Shares

Cost

Additional
Paid-in
Capital

Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
(Loss) Income

BALANCE, December 31, 2018 . . . . . . . 85,174
Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —
Foreign currency translation . . . . . . . . —
Unrealized gain on investments . . . . . —

$852
—
—
—

Total comprehensive income . . .

Adjustment for change in accounting

method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —
Treasury stock purchased . . . . . . . . . . —
Share-based compensation expense:

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . . —
Restricted stock award plans . . . —
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —

Common stock issued under:

—
—

—
—

—

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted stock award plans . . .
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

259
504

3
5

16 —

(15,401) $(220,700) $628,295
—
—
—

—
—
—

—
—
—

—
(235)

—
(3,875)

—
—

1,690
7,569

15

—
—

—

—
(2,740)

1,486
(4)

—

284

—
—

—

—
(166)

—

$(298)
—
(41)
683

—
—

—
—

—

—
—

—

Retained
Earnings

Total

$ (52,946) $355,203
69,982
(41)
683

69,982
—
—

70,624

1,035
—

1,035
(3,875)

—
—

—

—
—

—

1,690
7,569

15

1,489
(2,739)

284

BALANCE, December 31, 2019 . . . . . . . 85,953

$860

(15,802) $(227,315) $639,335

$ 344

$ 18,071 $431,295

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —
Foreign currency translation . . . . . . . . —
Unrealized loss on investments . . . . . —

Total comprehensive income . . .

Treasury stock purchased . . . . . . . . . . —
Share-based compensation expense:

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . . —
Restricted stock award plans . . . —
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —

Common stock issued under:

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted stock award plans . . .
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,040
243

29

—
—
—

—

—
—

—

10
2

1

—
—
—

—
—
—

(1,320)

(17,862)

—
—
—

—

—
—

—

—
(81)

—

—
—

—

1,134
12,227

18

—
(911)

5,374
(3)

—

338

—
199
(179)

124,264
—
—

124,264
199
(179)

124,284

—

—
—

—

—
—

—

— (17,862)

—
—

—

—
—

—

1,134
12,227

18

5,384
(912)

339

BALANCE, December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . 87,265

$873

(17,203) $(246,088) $658,423

$ 364

$142,335 $555,907

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —
Foreign currency translation . . . . . . . . —
Unrealized loss on investments . . . . . —

Total comprehensive income . . .

Treasury stock purchased . . . . . . . . . . —
Share-based compensation expense:

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . . —
Restricted stock award plans . . . —
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . —

Common stock issued under:

—
—
—

—

—
—

—

Stock option plans . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted stock award plans . . .
Employee stock purchase

plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

103
1,329

1
13

27 —

—
—
—

—
—
—

(2,313)

(25,296)

—
—
—

—

—
—

—

—
(460)

—

—
—

—

—
(5,511)

—

464
14,495

13

548
(13)

312

—
(177)
(283)

109,637
—
—

109,637
(177)
(283)

109,177

—

—
—

—

—
—

—

— (25,296)

—
—

—

—
—

—

464
14,495

13

549
(5,511)

312

BALANCE, December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . 88,724

$887

(19,976) $(276,895) $674,242

$ (96)

$251,972 $650,110

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

85

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES
CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(In thousands)

For the Year Ended December 31,
2019
2020
2021

CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:

Net income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

$ 109,637

$ 124,264

$ 69,982

Asset impairment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depreciation and amortization expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad debt expense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensation expense related to share-based awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss on disposition of asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

Student receivables, gross . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowance for credit losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receivables, other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inventories, prepaid expenses, and other current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other non-current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accounts payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accrued expenses and other non-current liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right of use asset and lease liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—
16,766
44,344
14,972
—
15,330

6,631
(47,417)
5,396
3,285
72
(2,744)
(3,404)
30,724
(2,476)

612
14,786
47,556
13,379
—
20,353

7,092
(39,546)
(99)
3,031
151
374
(11,135)
5,138
(6,000)

—
9,145
43,454
9,274
14
21,556

(33,697)
(36,326)
1,189
(1,180)
(489)
2,320
5,066
(7,704)
(9,519)

Net cash provided by operating activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

191,116

179,956

73,085

CASH FLOWS FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES:

Purchases of available-for-sale investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sales of available-for-sale investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purchases of property and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Business acquisitions, net of cash acquired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(269,739)
391,659
(10,453)
(57,143)
—

(403,673)
287,249
(9,768)
(39,819)
103

(449,367)
462,325
(5,174)
—
(85)

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54,324

(165,908)

7,699

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:

Purchase of treasury stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Issuance of common stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Payments of employee tax associated with stock compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(25,296)
861
(5,511)

(17,862)
5,723
(912)

Net cash used in financing activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(29,946)

(13,051)

(3,875)
1,774
(2,740)

(4,841)

EFFECT OF FOREIGN CURRENCY EXCHANGE RATE CHANGES ON

CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS AND RESTRICTED CASH:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—

—

13

NET INCREASE IN CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS AND RESTRICTED

CASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

215,494

997

75,956

CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS AND RESTRICTED CASH, beginning of the

year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

109,684

108,687

32,731

CASH, CASH EQUIVALENTS AND RESTRICTED CASH, end of the year . . . .

$ 325,178

$ 109,684

$ 108,687

Supplemental Cash Flow Information:

Income taxes paid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 23,224

$

611

$

46

Supplemental Non-Cash Disclosures:

Amount placed in escrow to secure indemnification obligations from business

acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-cash additions to property and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right of use assets obtained in exchange for lease liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$
$
$

1,210
2,287
727

$
$
$

4,000
52
552

$
$
$

—
38

—

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

86

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019

1. DESCRIPTION OF THE COMPANY

Perdoceo’s academic institutions offer a quality postsecondary education primarily online to a diverse
student population, along with campus-based and blended learning programs. Our accredited institutions –
Colorado Technical University (“CTU”) and the American InterContinental University System (“AIUS” or
“AIU System”) – provide degree programs from associate through doctoral level as well as non-degree
professional development and continuing education offerings. Our universities offer students industry-relevant
and career-focused academic programs that are designed to meet the educational needs of today’s busy adults.
CTU and AIUS continue to show innovation in higher education, advancing personalized learning technologies
like their intellipath® learning platform and using data analytics and technology to support students and enhance
learning. Perdoceo is committed to providing quality education that closes the gap between learners who seek to
advance their careers and employers needing a qualified workforce.

As used in this Annual Report on Form 10-K, the terms “we,” “us,” “our,” “the Company,” “Perdoceo” and

“PEC” refer to Perdoceo Education Corporation and our wholly-owned subsidiaries.

2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

a. Principles of Consolidation and Basis of Financial Statement Presentation

These consolidated financial statements presented herein include the accounts of Perdoceo Education

Corporation and our wholly-owned subsidiaries (collectively “Perdoceo”or “PEC”). All inter-company
transactions and balances have been eliminated.

Our reporting segments are determined in accordance with Financial Accounting Standards Board

(“FASB”) Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) Topic 280 – Segment Reporting and are based upon how
the Company analyzes performance and makes decisions. Each segment represents a postsecondary education
provider that offers a variety of academic programs. We organize our business across two reporting segments:
CTU and AIUS.

On August 2, 2021, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of DigitalCrafts. DigitalCrafts
operations were brought within the AIUS segment, preserving the “DigitalCrafts” name and programs as part of
AIUS’ operations. Results of operations related to the DigitalCrafts acquisition are included in the consolidated
financial statements from the date of acquisition. See Note 3 “Business Acquisitions” in our consolidated
financial statements for further information.

On September 10, 2021, the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of Hippo Education (“Hippo”).

Hippo’s operations were brought within the CTU segment, preserving the “Hippo Education” name and
programs as part of the CTU’s operations. Results of operations related to the Hippo acquisition are included in
the consolidated financial statements from the date of acquisition. See Note 3 “Business Acquisitions” in our
consolidated financial statements for further information.

b. Management’s Use of Estimates

The preparation of our consolidated financial statements in conformity with U.S. generally accepted
accounting principles (“GAAP”) requires us to make certain estimates and assumptions that affect the reported
amounts of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses
during the period. We regularly evaluate the accounting policies and estimates that we use to prepare our

87

financial statements. Significant estimates, among others, include the allowance for credit losses, the assumptions
surrounding future projections of revenues and expenses used in determining the probable outcome of
performance conditions related to performance-based compensation, the assumptions used in determining the
discount rate to calculate right of use assets and lease liabilities, assumptions used in calculating income tax
related matters including our deferred tax balances and any respective valuation allowance, fair values used in
establishing the opening balance sheet for business combinations and fair values used in asset impairment
evaluations including goodwill, intangible assets and long-lived assets. Actual results could differ from these
estimates.

c. Student Receivables and Allowance for Credit Losses

Student receivables represent funds owed to us in exchange for the educational services provided to a
student. Student receivables are reported net of an allowance for credit losses at the end of the reporting period.
Student receivables which are due to be paid in less than one year are recorded as current assets within our
consolidated balance sheets. Student receivables which are due to be paid more than one year from the balance
sheet date are reported as non-current assets within our consolidated balance sheets.

A substantial portion of credit extended to students is repaid through the students’ participation in various

federal financial aid programs authorized by Title IV of the Higher Education Act of 1965, as amended (“Higher
Education Act”), which we refer to as “Title IV Programs.” For the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and
2019, approximately 81%, 80% and 79%, respectively, of our institutions’ cash receipts from tuition payments
came from Title IV Program funding.

Generally, a student receivable balance is written off once a student is out of school and it reaches greater
than 90 days past due. Although we analyze past due receivables, it is not practical to provide an aging of our
non-current student receivable balances as a result of the methodology used in determining our earned student
receivable balances. Student receivables are recognized on our consolidated balance sheets as they are deemed
earned over the course of a student’s program and/or term, and therefore cash collections are not applied against
specifically dated transactions.

We extend unsecured credit to a portion of the students who are enrolled at our academic institutions for
tuition and certain other educational costs. Based upon past experience and judgment, we establish an allowance
for credit losses with respect to student receivables which we estimate will ultimately not be collectible. As such,
our results from operations only reflect the amount of revenue that is estimated to be reasonably collectible. Our
standard student receivable allowance is based on an estimate of lifetime expected credit losses for student
receivables. Our estimation methodology considers a number of quantitative and qualitative factors that, based on
our collection experience, we believe have an impact on our repayment risk and ability to collect student
receivables. Changes in the trends in any of these factors may impact our estimate of the allowance for credit
losses. These factors include, but are not limited to: internal repayment history, changes in the current economic,
legislative or regulatory environments, internal cash collection forecasts and the ability to complete the federal
financial aid process with the student. These factors are monitored and assessed on a regular basis. Overall, our
allowance estimation process for student receivables is validated by trending analysis and comparing estimated
and actual performance.

We monitor our collections and write-off experience to assess whether or not adjustments to our allowance
percentage estimates are necessary. Changes in trends in any of the factors that we believe impact the collection
of our student receivables, as noted above, or modifications to our collection practices, and other related policies
may impact our estimate of our allowance for credit losses and our results from operations.

d. Revenue Recognition

Our revenue, which is derived primarily from academic programs taught to students who attend our
universities, is generally segregated into two categories: (1) tuition and fees, and (2) other. Tuition and fees

88

represent costs to our students for educational services provided by our universities and are reflected net of
scholarships and tuition discounts. Our universities charge tuition and fees at varying amounts, depending on the
university, the type of program and specific curriculum. Our universities bill students a single charge that covers
tuition, fees and required program materials, such as textbooks and supplies, which we treat as a single
performance obligation. Generally, we bill student tuition at the beginning of each academic term for our degree
programs and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the academic term. As part of a
student’s course of instruction, certain fees, such as technology fees and graduation fees, are billed to students.
These fees are earned over the applicable term and are not considered separate performance obligations. We bill
student tuition upon enrollment for our non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings
and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the length of the course.

For each term, the portion of tuition and fee payments received from students but not yet earned is recorded

as deferred revenue and reported as a current liability on our consolidated balance sheets, as we expect to earn
these revenues within the next year. A contract asset is recorded for each student for the current term for which
they are enrolled for the amount charged for the current term that has not yet been received as payment and to
which we do not have the unconditional right to receive payment because the student has not reached the point in
the student’s current academic term at which the amount billed is no longer refundable to the student. On a
student by student basis, the contract asset is offset against the deferred revenue balance for the current term and
the net deferred revenue balance is reflected within current liabilities on our consolidated balance sheets. For
AIUS’ Trident and DigitalCrafts programs and CTU’s Hippo programs, students are billed as they enroll in
courses, including courses related to future periods. Any billings for future periods would meet the definition of a
contract asset as we do not have the unconditional right to receive payment as the course has not yet started.
Contract assets related to future periods are offset against the respective deferred revenue associated with the
future period.

If a student withdraws from one of our universities prior to the completion of the academic term, we refund

the portion of tuition and fees already paid that, pursuant to our refund policy and applicable federal and state law
and accrediting agency standards, we are not entitled to retain. Generally, the amount to be refunded to a student
is calculated based upon the percent of the term attended and the amount of tuition and fees paid by the student
as of their withdrawal date. Students are typically entitled to a partial refund until approximately halfway through
their term. Pursuant to each university’s policy, once a student reaches the point in the term where no refund is
given, the student would not have a refund due if withdrawing from the university subsequent to that date.
Management reassesses collectability when a student withdraws from the university and has unpaid tuition
charges for the current term which the university is entitled to retain per the applicable refund policy. Such
unpaid charges generally do not meet the threshold of reasonably collectible and are recognized as revenue in
accordance with ASC Topic 606 when cash is received and the contract is terminated and neither party has
further performance obligations.

Our institutions’ academic year is generally at least 30 weeks in length but varies both by institution and
program of study and is divided by academic terms. Academic terms are determined by regulatory requirements
mandated by the federal government and/or applicable accrediting body, which also vary by university and
program. Academic terms are determined by start dates, which vary by university and program and are generally
8-12 weeks in length. Our non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings are generally
16-52 weeks in length. Our students finance costs through a variety of funding sources, including, among others,
federal loan and grant programs, institutional payment plans, employer reimbursement, Veterans’ Administration
and other military funding and grants, private and institutional scholarships and cash payments, as well as private
loans for our non-degree programs.

Other revenue, which consists primarily of contract training revenue, bookstore sales and miscellaneous
non-student related revenue, is billed and recognized as goods are delivered or services are performed. Contract
training revenue results from individual courses that are stand-alone courses and not part of a degree or
certificate program. Bookstore sales are primarily initiated by the student and are not included in the enrollment

89

agreement at the onset of a student’s entrance to the institution. Miscellaneous non-student related revenue
consists of staffing services provided to third parties and software license fees. These types of sales constitute a
separate performance obligation from classroom instruction.

e. Cash, Cash Equivalents and Restricted Cash

Cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash include cash and highly liquid investments with original

maturities of three months or less. The fair market value of cash, cash equivalents and restricted cash
approximate their carrying value. The cash in the Company’s banks is not fully insured by the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation. The Company has not experienced any material losses in such accounts. The restricted
cash balance as of December 31, 2021 was $5.2 million and relates to amounts held in escrow accounts to secure
post-closing indemnification obligations of the seller pursuant to the Trident and Hippo acquisitions.

Students at our institutions may receive grants, loans and work-study opportunities to fund their education

under Title IV Programs. In certain instances, students may request that we retain a portion of their Title IV
funds provided to them in excess of tuition billings and authorize us to apply these funds to historical balances or
future charges and/or distribute them directly to the student in certain cases. As of December 31, 2021 and 2020,
we held $10.4 million and $10.0 million, respectively, of these funds on behalf of students within cash and cash
equivalents on our consolidated balance sheet, with the offset recorded as prepaid revenue within deferred
revenue on our consolidated balance sheets.

f. Investments

Our investments, which primarily consist of municipal bonds, non-governmental debt securities and treasury

and federal agencies securities are classified as “available-for-sale” and recorded at fair value. The Company
measures the fair value of financial instruments under the guidance of ASC Topic 820, Fair Value Measurement.
Any unrealized holding gains or temporary unrealized holding losses, net of income tax effects, are reported as a
component of accumulated other comprehensive income within stockholders’ equity. Realized gains and losses
are computed on the basis of specific identification and are included in other income (loss) in our consolidated
statements of income.

We use the equity method to account for our investment in equity securities if our investment gives us the

ability to exercise significant influence over operating and financial policies of the investee. We include our
proportionate share of earnings and/or losses of our equity method investee in other income within our
consolidated statements of income. The carrying value of our equity investment is reported within other
non-current assets on our consolidated balance sheets.

Our investment in an equity affiliate equated to a 30.7%, or $3.2 million, non-controlling interest in CCKF,

a Dublin-based educational technology company providing intelligent systems to power the delivery of
individualized and personalized learning.

g. Property and Equipment

Property and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation. Depreciation and amortization are

recognized using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the related assets for financial
reporting purposes and an accelerated method for income tax reporting purposes. Leasehold improvements are
amortized on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the life of the lease or the useful life. Maintenance, repairs,
minor renewals and betterments are expensed as incurred, and major improvements, which extend the useful life
of the asset, are capitalized.

h. Goodwill and Intangible Assets

Goodwill represents the excess of cost over fair market value of identifiable net assets acquired through
business purchases. In accordance with FASB ASC Topic 350 – Intangibles-Goodwill and Other, we review

90

goodwill for impairment on at least an annual basis by applying a fair-value-based test. In evaluating the
recoverability of the carrying value of goodwill, we must make assumptions regarding the fair value of our
reporting units, as defined under FASB ASC Topic 350. Goodwill is evaluated by comparing the book value of a
reporting unit, including goodwill, with its fair value, as determined by a combination of income and market
approach valuation methodologies (“quantitative assessment”). If the book value of a reporting unit exceeds its
fair value, goodwill of the reporting unit is considered to be impaired. The amount of impairment loss is equal to
the excess of the book value of the goodwill over the fair value of goodwill. In certain cases, a qualitative
assessment may be used to determine if it is more likely than not that a reporting unit’s carrying value exceeds its
fair value and if the quantitative assessment is needed.

When performing a qualitative assessment for the annual review of goodwill balances for impairment,
management must first consider events and circumstances that may affect the fair value of the reporting unit to
determine whether it is necessary to perform the quantitative impairment test. Management focuses on the
significant inputs and any events or circumstances that could affect the significant inputs, including, but not
limited to, financial performance compared with actual and projected results of relevant prior periods, legal,
regulatory, contractual, competitive, economic, political, business or other factors, and industry and market
considerations, such as a deteriorating operating environment or increased competition. Management evaluates
all events and circumstances, including positive or mitigating factors, that could affect the significant inputs used
to determine fair value. If management determines that it is not more likely than not that the goodwill of the
reporting unit is impaired based upon its qualitative assessment then it does not need to perform the quantitative
assessment.

When performing a quantitative assessment for the annual review of goodwill balances for impairment, we
estimate the fair value of each of our reporting units based on projected future operating results and cash flows,
market assumptions and/or comparative market multiple methods. Determining fair value requires significant
estimates and assumptions based on an evaluation of a number of factors, such as marketplace participants,
relative market share, new student interest, student retention, future expansion or contraction expectations,
amount and timing of future cash flows and the discount rate applied to the cash flows. Projected future operating
results and cash flows used for valuation purposes do reflect improvements relative to recent historical periods
with respect to, among other things, modest revenue growth and operating margins. Although we believe our
projected future operating results and cash flows and related estimates regarding fair values are based on
reasonable assumptions, historically projected operating results and cash flows have not always been achieved.
The failure of one of our reporting units to achieve projected operating results and cash flows in the near term or
long term may reduce the estimated fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying value and result in the
recognition of a goodwill impairment charge. Significant management judgment is necessary to evaluate the
impact of operating and macroeconomic changes and to estimate future cash flows. Assumptions used in our
impairment evaluations, such as forecasted growth rates and our cost of capital, are based on the best available
market information and are consistent with our internal forecasts and operating plans. In addition to cash flow
estimates, our valuations are sensitive to the rate used to discount cash flows and future growth assumptions.

Intangible assets include indefinite-lived assets. Indefinite-lived assets include our CTU trade name and

accreditation rights, which are recorded at fair market value upon acquisition and subsequently reviewed on an
annual basis for impairment. Accreditation rights represent the ability of our institutions to participate in Title IV
Programs.

Definite-lived intangible assets consist of the Trident, DigitalCrafts and Hippo trade names, customer
relationships, course curriculum and developed technology. Customer relationships represent the value of
acquired student and third party contracts and are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated future
benefit period for those contracts. Course curriculum represents the value of acquired curriculum, including
lesson plans and syllabi, used to deliver educational services. Acquired course curriculum balances are amortized
on a straight-line basis over their useful lives, which are estimated by management based upon, among other
things, the expected future utilization period and the nature of the related academic programs. Developed

91

technology represents online auditory and video course program materials related to our non-degree professional
development and continuing education offerings and are amortized on a straight-line basis over the expected
period of future benefit.

See Note 10 “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets” for further discussion.

i. Contingencies

During the ordinary course of business, the Company may be subject to various claims and contingencies. In

accordance with FASB ASC Topic 450 – Contingencies, when we become aware of a claim or potential claim,
we assess the likelihood of any related loss or exposure. The probability a liability has been incurred, and
whether the amount of loss can be reasonably estimated, is analyzed, and if the loss contingency is both probable
and reasonably estimable, then we accrue for costs, including direct costs incurred, associated with the loss
contingency. If no accrual is made but the loss contingency is reasonably possible, we disclose the nature of the
contingency and the related estimate of possible loss or range of loss if such an estimate can be made. For all
matters that are currently being reviewed, we expense legal fees, including defense costs, as they are incurred.
Loss contingencies include, but are not limited to, possible losses related to legal proceedings and regulatory
compliance matters, and our assessment of exposure requires subjective assessment. Liabilities established to
provide for contingencies are adjusted as further information develops, circumstances change, or contingencies
are resolved. See Note 12 “Contingencies” for additional information.

j. Income Taxes

We are subject to the income tax laws of the U.S. and various state and local jurisdictions. These tax laws
are complex and subject to interpretation. As a result, significant judgments and interpretations are required in
determining our income tax provisions (benefits) and evaluating our uncertain tax positions.

We account for income taxes in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 740 – Income Taxes. Topic 740 requires

the recognition of deferred income tax assets and liabilities based upon the income tax consequences of
temporary differences between financial reporting and income tax reporting by applying enacted statutory
income tax rates applicable to future years to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts and
the income tax basis of existing assets and liabilities. Topic 740 also requires that deferred income tax assets be
reduced by a valuation allowance if it is more likely than not that some portion of the deferred income tax asset
will not be realized.

In assessing the need for a valuation allowance and/or release of a valuation allowance, we consider both

positive and negative evidence related to the likelihood of realization of the deferred tax assets. Topic 740
provides that important factors in determining whether a deferred tax asset will be realized are whether there has
been sufficient taxable income in recent years and whether sufficient taxable income is expected in future years
in order to use the deferred tax asset. In evaluating the realizability of deferred income tax assets, we consider,
among other things, historical levels of taxable income along with possible sources of future taxable income,
which include: the expected timing of the reversals of existing temporary reporting differences, the existence of
taxable income in prior carryback year(s), the expected impact of tax planning strategies that may be
implemented to prevent the potential loss of future income tax benefits, expected future taxable income and
earnings history exclusive of the loss that created the future deductible amount, coupled with evidence indicating
the loss is not a continuing condition. Changes in, among other things, income tax legislation, statutory income
tax rates, or future taxable income levels could materially impact our valuation of income tax assets and
liabilities and could cause our income tax provision to vary significantly among financial reporting periods. If,
based on the weight of available evidence, it is more likely than not the deferred tax assets will not be realized,
we record a valuation allowance, or release all or a portion of the valuation allowance if it is more likely than not
the deferred tax assets are expected to be realized. The weight given to the positive and negative evidence is
commensurate with the extent to which the evidence may be objectively verified. A high degree of judgment is

92

required to determine if, and the extent to which, valuation allowances should be recorded against deferred tax
assets.

Topic 740 further clarifies the accounting for uncertainty in income taxes recognized in an entity’s financial

statements and prescribes a recognition threshold and measurement attribute for the financial statement
recognition and measurement of a tax position taken or expected to be taken in an income tax return. Topic 740
also provides guidance on derecognition, classification, interest and penalties, accounting in interim periods,
disclosure and transition.

k. Leases

FASB ASC Topic 842 – Leases states that all leases create an asset and a liability for the lessee in
accordance with FASB Concept Statements No. 6 Elements of Financial Statements, and thus requires the
recognition of a lease liability and a right of use asset at the lease inception date. We lease most of our
administrative and educational facilities under non-cancelable operating leases expiring at various dates with
terms that generally range from five to ten years with one to four renewal options for extended terms. In most
cases, we are required to make additional payments under facility operating leases for taxes, insurance and other
operating expenses incurred during the operating lease period. We determine if a contract contains a lease when
the contract conveys the right to control the use of identified property, plant or equipment for a period of time in
exchange for consideration. Upon such identification and commencement of a lease, we establish a right of use
(“ROU”) asset and a lease liability in our consolidated balance sheets.

A lease component is defined as an asset within the lease contract that a lessee can benefit from the use of

and is not highly dependent or interrelated with other assets in the arrangement. A lease contract may contain
multiple lease components. A non-lease component is defined as a component of the lease that transfers a good
or service for the underlying asset, such as maintenance services. We have determined that all of our leases
contain one lease component related to the building and land. We have determined that treating the land together
with the building as one lease component would not result in a significant difference from accounting for them as
separate lease components. Additionally, we have elected the practical expedient to include both the lease
component and the non-lease component as a single component when accounting for each lease and calculating
the resulting lease liability and ROU asset. Any remaining contract consideration, such as property taxes and
insurance, that does not meet the definition of a lease component or non-lease component would be allocated to
the single lease component based on our election.

The lease liability represents future lease payments for lease and non-lease components discounted for
present value. Lease payments that may be included in the lease liability include fixed payments, variable lease
payments that are based on an index or rate and payments for penalties for terminating the lease if the lessee is
reasonably certain to use a termination option, among others. Certain of our leases contain rent escalation clauses
that are specifically stated in the lease and these are included in the calculation of the lease liability. Variable
lease payments for lease and non-lease components which are not based on an index or rate are excluded from
the calculation of the lease liability and are recognized in the statement of income during the period incurred.

The ROU asset consists of the amount of the initial measurement of the lease liability and adjusted for any

lease incentives, including rent abatements and tenant improvement allowances, and any initial direct costs
incurred by the lessee. The ROU asset is amortized over the remaining lease term on a straight-line basis and
recorded within educational services and facilities on our consolidated statements of income.

The lease term is determined by taking into account the initial period as stated in the lease contract and
adjusted for any renewal options that the company is reasonably certain to exercise as well as any period of time
that the lessee has control of the space before the stated initial term of the lease. If we determine that we are
reasonably certain to exercise a termination option, the lease term is then adjusted to account for the expected
termination date.

93

We use discount rates to determine the net present value of our gross lease obligations when calculating the

lease liability and related ROU asset. In cases in which the rate implicit in the lease is readily determinable, we
use that discount rate for purposes of the net present value calculation. In most cases, our lease agreements do not
have a discount rate that is readily determinable and therefore we use an estimate of our incremental borrowing
rate. Our incremental borrowing rate is determined at lease commencement or lease modification and represents
the rate of interest we would have to pay to borrow on a collateralized basis over a similar term an amount equal
to the lease payments in a similar economic environment.

See Note 9 “Leases” for further details.

l. Share-Based Compensation

FASB ASC Topic 718 – Compensation-Stock Compensation requires that all share-based payments to
employees and non-employee directors, including grants of stock options, shares or units of restricted stock, and
the compensatory elements of employee stock purchase plans, be recognized in the financial statements based on
the estimated fair value of the equity or liability instruments issued.

Our share-based awards are measured at fair value and recognized over the requisite service or performance

period. The fair value of each stock option is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes-Merton
option pricing model, based on the market price of the underlying common stock, expected life, expected stock
price volatility and expected risk-free interest rate. Expected volatility is computed using a combination of
historical volatility for a period equal to the expected term; the risk-free interest rates are based on the U.S.
Treasury yield curve, with a remaining term approximately equal to the expected term used in the option pricing
model. The fair value of each restricted stock unit award is estimated based on the market price of the underlying
common stock on the date of the grant. The fair value of each market-based performance grant is estimated using
the Monte Carlo Simulation methodology to assess the grant date fair value. We estimate forfeitures at the time
of grant and revise our estimate in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from those estimates. For our
performance-based awards, the performance criteria is assessed each reporting period to determine the
probability of attainment.

See Note 14 “Share-Based Compensation” for further discussion of our share-based compensation plans, the

nature of share-based awards issued under the plans and our accounting for share-based awards.

m. Advertising and Marketing Costs

Advertising and marketing costs are expensed as incurred. Advertising and marketing costs, which are
included in general and administrative expense on our consolidated statements of income, were $137.2 million,
$143.3 million and $130.9 million, for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, respectively.

3. BUSINESS ACQUISITIONS

During the year ended December 31, 2021, the Company completed the DigitalCrafts and Hippo

acquisitions on August 2, 2021 and September 10, 2021, respectively. During the year ended December 31, 2020,
the Company acquired substantially all of the assets of Trident University International (“Trident University”) on
March 2, 2020.

DigitalCrafts, launched in 2015, helps provide individuals an opportunity in the technology area through

reskilling and upskilling courses within the areas of web development, web design and cybersecurity.
DigitalCrafts’ programs are now offered by AIUS under the ‘DigitalCrafts’ name. On the date of acquisition, the
Company made a cash payment of $16.3 million for the DigitalCrafts assets and a subsequent working capital
payment of $0.2 million. The initial and working capital payments were fully funded with the Company’s
available cash balances. Pursuant to the acquisition agreement, a post-closing contingent consideration payment
of up to $2.5 million is expected to be paid in early 2024 based upon the achievement of certain financial metrics.

94

The purchase price of $18.4 million for the DigitalCrafts assets consists of the initial purchase price of

$16.3 million, the working capital payment of $0.2 million and the fair value calculation of contingent
consideration of $1.9 million. The purchase price was allocated to the fair values of acquired tangible and
identifiable intangible assets of $20.0 million and assumed liabilities of $1.7 million as of August 2, 2021. The
fair value of student receivables is equal to the gross contractual amount of student receivables. Intangible assets
acquired include a trade name with a fair value of approximately $0.7 million with an estimated useful life of 5
years and customer relationships and developed technology with an aggregate fair value of $1.0 million with
estimated useful lives of 3 years each. Based on our purchase price allocation, we recorded goodwill of
$16.5 million. Goodwill reflects the revenue growth opportunities following the acquisition. We expect
substantially all of this goodwill balance to be deductible for income tax reporting purposes.

Hippo, founded in 2011, is a provider of continuing medical education and exam preparation for medical

professionals with a quality technology platform and strong course content. Hippo programs are now offered by
CTU under the ‘Hippo Education’ name. On the date of acquisition, the Company made an initial cash payment
of $42.0 million. Pursuant to the terms of the acquisition agreement, $1.2 million of this payment was set aside in
an escrow account to secure indemnification obligations of the seller after closing and is reflected as restricted
cash on our consolidated balance sheets. The initial payment was fully funded with the Company’s available cash
balances. Additionally, pursuant to the purchase agreement, a post-closing contingent consideration payment of
up to $4.0 million is expected to be paid in early 2024 based upon the achievement of certain financial metrics.

The purchase price of $43.3 million for Hippo represents the initial purchase price of $42.0 million as well
as the fair value calculation of contingent consideration of $1.3 million. The purchase price was allocated to the
fair values of acquired tangible and identifiable intangible assets of $47.5 million and assumed liabilities of
$4.3 million as of September 10, 2021. The fair value of student receivables is equal to the gross contractual
amount of student receivables. Intangible assets acquired include a trade name with a fair value of approximately
$3.3 million with an estimated useful life of 10 years, customer relationships with a fair value of approximately
$14.1 million with an estimated useful life of 7 years and developed technology with a fair value of $2.0 million
with an estimated useful life of 4 years. Based on our purchase price allocation, we recorded goodwill of
$27.8 million. Goodwill reflects the revenue growth opportunities following the acquisition. We expect
substantially all of this goodwill balance to be deductible for income tax reporting purposes.

Trident University, a regionally accredited university, offers online undergraduate, master’s and doctoral
programs with a strong focus on graduate programs. Trident University’s operations were brought within the
scope of the state licensure, accreditation and Department of Education (“Department”) approval of American
InterContinental University, with Trident University relinquishing its accreditor and Department approvals.
Trident University’s programs are now offered by AIU under the “Trident” name. The combined institution
continues to serve existing and future students with a broader range of program offerings and resources.

During 2020, the Company made a total cash payment of $43.8 million for the acquisition of Trident
University assets. Pursuant to the purchase agreement, $4.0 million of this payment was set aside in an escrow
account to secure indemnification obligations of the seller after closing and is reflected as restricted cash on our
consolidated balance sheets. The purchase price of $43.8 million was allocated to the fair values of acquired
tangible and identifiable intangible assets of $53.1 million and assumed liabilities of $9.3 million as of March 2,
2020. Intangible assets acquired include a trade name with a fair value of $1.0 million with an estimated useful
life of 5 years and customer relationships and course curriculum with an aggregate fair value of $9.4 million with
estimated useful lives of 3 years each. Based on the final purchase price allocation, we recorded goodwill of
$31.0 million. We expect substantially all of this goodwill balance to be deductible for income tax reporting
purposes.

95

The following table summarizes the fair values of assets acquired and liabilities assumed as of respective

acquisition dates (dollars in thousands):

Trident University
March 2, 2020

DigitalCrafts
August 2, 2021

Hippo
September 10, 2021

Assets:
Cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Student receivables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Property and equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intangible assets subject to amortization

Trade name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer relationships . . . . . . . . . . .
Course curriculum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developed technology . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Goodwill
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred tax asset
Other non-current assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ —
6,212
912
3,932

1,000
8,000
1,400
—
30,956
454
270

$ —
1,777
4
—

740
200
—
830
16,477
—
—

$

93
202
25
27

3,340
14,100
—
1,960
27,790
—
—

Total assets acquired . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$53,136

$20,028

$47,537

Liabilities:
Accounts payable and other accrued

liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deferred revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loan discharge reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other long-term liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total liabilities assumed . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 2,622
4,749
1,900
46

$ 9,317

Net assets acquired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$43,819

$

268
1,404
—
—

$ 1,672

$18,356

$

315
3,952
—
—

$ 4,267

$43,270

Pro forma financial information relating to the Trident, DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions is not presented

because the acquisitions are not material to the Company.

4. RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

Recent accounting guidance adopted in 2021

In October 2021, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2021-08, Business

Combinations (Topic 805): Accounting for Contract Assets and Contract Liabilities from Contracts with
Customers. The amendments in this ASU provide guidance to improve the accounting for acquired revenue
contracts with customers in a business combination. This ASU addresses the inconsistency by providing specific
guidance on how to recognize and measure acquired contract assets and contract liabilities from revenue
contracts in a business combination. The amendment in this ASU requires an entity (acquirer) to recognize and
measure contract assets and contract liabilities acquired in a business combination in accordance with Topic 606.
For all public business entities, ASU 2021-08 is effective for annual periods and interim periods beginning after
December 15, 2022; early adoption is permitted for public organizations for which financial statements have not
yet been issued. We have early adopted this guidance during 2021 and applied this guidance to both the
DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions. The adoption of this guidance did not significantly impact the accounting
for these acquisitions.

In December 2019, the FASB issued ASU No. 2019-12, Income Taxes (Topic 740): Simplifying the
Accounting for Income Taxes. The amendments in this ASU simplify the accounting for income taxes by

96

removing certain exceptions, including the exception to the incremental approach for intraperiod tax allocation
when there is a loss from continuing operations and income or a gain from other items and the exception to the
general methodology for calculating income taxes in an interim period when a year-to-date loss exceeds the
anticipated loss for the year. The amendments in this ASU also simplify the accounting for income taxes by
requiring that an entity recognize a franchise tax (or similar tax) that is partially based on income as an income-
based tax and account for any incremental amount incurred as a non-income-based tax and requiring that an
entity reflect the effect of an enacted change in tax laws or rates in the annual effective tax rate computation in
the interim period that includes the enactment date. For all public business entities, ASU 2019-12 is effective for
annual periods and interim periods beginning after December 15, 2020. We have evaluated and adopted this
guidance effective January 1, 2021. The adoption did not significantly impact the presentation of our financial
condition, results of operations and disclosures.

5. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Investments consist of the following as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 (dollars in thousands):

December 31, 2021

Gross Unrealized

Cost

Gain

(Loss)

Fair Value

Short-term investments (available for sale):

Municipal bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-governmental debt securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treasury and federal agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$

5,028
168,623
720

$—
27
—

$

(1)
(184)
—

$

5,027
168,466
720

Total short-term investments (available for

sale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$174,371

$ 27

$(185)

$174,213

December 31, 2020

Gross Unrealized

Cost

Gain

(Loss)

Fair Value

Short-term investments (available for sale):

Municipal bonds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-governmental debt securities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Treasury and federal agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$

139
288,578
11,799

$

1
331
6

$ —
(176)
(2)

$

140
288,733
11,803

Total short-term investments (available for

sale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$300,516

$338

$(178)

$300,676

In the table above, unrealized holding gains (losses) relate to short-term investments that have been in a

continuous unrealized gain (loss) position for less than one year.

Our non-governmental debt securities primarily consist of corporate bonds, certificates of deposit and
commercial paper. Our treasury and federal agencies primarily consist of U.S. Treasury bills and federal home
loan debt securities. We do not intend to sell our investments in these securities prior to maturity and it is not
likely that we will be required to sell these investments before recovery of the amortized cost basis.

97

A schedule of available-for-sale investments segregated by their original stated terms to maturity as of

December 31, 2021 and 2020 are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Less than
one year

One to
five years

Six to
ten
years

Greater
than ten
years

Total

Original stated term to maturity of available-for-sale- . . . . . .
investments as of December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Original stated term to maturity of available-for-sale- . . . . . .
investments as of December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$133,728

$ 40,485

$— $— $174,213

$182,959

$117,641

$— $ 76

$300,676

Realized gains or losses resulting from sales of investments during the years ended December 31, 2021,

2020 and 2019 were not significant.

Fair Value Measurements

FASB ASC Topic 820 – Fair Value Measurements establishes a three-tier fair value hierarchy, which
prioritizes the inputs used in measuring fair value. These tiers include: Level 1, defined as observable inputs such
as quoted prices in active markets; Level 2, defined as inputs other than quoted prices in active markets that are
either directly or indirectly observable; and Level 3, defined as unobservable inputs for which little or no market
data exists, therefore requiring an entity to develop its own assumptions.

As of December 31, 2021 and 2020, we held investments that are required to be measured at fair value on a

recurring basis. These investments (available for sale) consist of municipal bonds, non-governmental debt
securities and treasury and federal agencies securities. Available for sale securities included in Level 2 are
estimated based on observable inputs other than quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities,
such as quoted prices for identical or similar assets or liabilities in inactive markets or other inputs that are
observable or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the assets or
liabilities.

All of our available for sale investments were measured under Level 2 as of December 31, 2021 and
December 31, 2020. Additionally, money market funds of $225.3 million and $1.7 million included within cash
and cash equivalents on our consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively, were
measured under Level 1 and certificates of deposit, commercial paper and treasury bills of $5.1 million included
within cash and cash equivalents on our consolidated balance sheets as of December 31, 2020 were measured
under Level 2.

Equity Method Investment

Our investment in an equity affiliate, which is recorded within other noncurrent assets on our consolidated

balance sheets, represents an international investment in a private company. As of December 31, 2021, our
investment in an equity affiliate equated to a 30.7%, or $3.2 million, non-controlling interest in CCKF, a Dublin-
based educational technology company providing intelligent systems to power the delivery of individualized and
personalized learning.

We recorded a gain of approximately $0.2 million each for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020,

respectively, and recorded a gain of approximately $0.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2019, related to
our proportionate investment in CCKF within miscellaneous income on our consolidated statements of income.

98

We make periodic operating maintenance payments to CCKF related to proprietary rights that we use in our

intellipath® personalized learning technology. The total fees recorded for the years ended December 31, 2021,
2020 and 2019 were as follows (dollars in thousands):

For the year ended December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$1,726

For the year ended December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$1,596

For the year ended December 31, 2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$1,418

6. REVENUE RECOGNITION

Disaggregation of Revenue

The following tables disaggregate our revenue by major source for the years ended December 31, 2021,

2020 and 2019 (dollars in thousands):

For the Year Ended December 31, 2021

CTU (4)

AIUS (5)

Corporate and
Other (6)

Tuition, net (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other miscellaneous fees(2)

$384,307
21,249
1,227

$269,645
11,322
665

Total tuition and fees, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

406,783

281,632

Other revenue(3)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,766

1,728

Total revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$408,549

$283,360

$ —
—
—

—

1,125

$1,125

Total

$653,952
32,571
1,892

688,415

4,619

$693,034

For the Year Ended December 31, 2020

CTU

AIUS

Corporate and
Other (6)

Tuition, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other miscellaneous fees(2)

$381,371
20,687
1,283

$270,430
10,122
686

Total tuition and fees, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

403,341

281,238

Other revenue(3)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,166

123

$ —
—
—

—

446

Total

$651,801
30,809
1,969

684,579

2,735

Total revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$405,507

$281,361

$ 446

$687,314

For the Year Ended December 31, 2019

CTU

AIUS

Corporate and
Other (6)

Tuition, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technology fees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other miscellaneous fees(2)

$370,318
17,844
1,690

$225,364
9,412
428

Total tuition and fees, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

389,852

235,204

$ —
—
—

—

Other revenue(3)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,411

170

Total revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$392,263

$235,374

$

67

67

Total

$595,682
27,256
2,118

625,056

2,648

$627,704

(1) Tuition includes revenue earned for degree-granting programs as well as revenue earned for non-degree
professional development and continuing education offerings related to the DigitalCrafts and Hippo
acquisitions from the date of acquisitions.

99

(2) Other miscellaneous fees include student activity fees and graduation fees.
(3) Other revenue primarily includes contract training revenue and miscellaneous non-student related revenue.
(4) CTU includes revenue related to the Hippo acquisition commencing on the September 10, 2021 date of

acquisition.

(5) AIUS includes revenue related to the (i) DigitalCrafts acquisition commencing on the August 2, 2021 date

of acquisition, and (ii) Trident acquisition commencing on the March 2, 2020 date of acquisition.
(6) Revenue recorded within Corporate and Other relates to miscellaneous non-student related revenue.

Performance Obligations

Our revenue, which is derived primarily from academic programs taught to students who attend our
universities, is generally segregated into two categories: (1) tuition and fees, and (2) other. Tuition and fees
represent costs to our students for educational services provided by our universities and are reflected net of
scholarships and tuition discounts. Our universities charge tuition and fees at varying amounts, depending on the
university, the type of program and specific curriculum. Our universities bill students a single charge that covers
tuition, fees and required program materials, such as textbooks and supplies, which we treat as a single
performance obligation. Generally, we bill student tuition at the beginning of each academic term for our degree
programs and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the academic term. As part of a
student’s course of instruction, certain fees, such as technology fees and graduation fees, are billed to students.
These fees are earned over the applicable term and are not considered separate performance obligations. We bill
student tuition upon enrollment for our non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings
and recognize the tuition as revenue on a straight-line basis over the length of the course.

Other revenue, which consists of contract training revenue, bookstore sales and miscellaneous non-student related

revenue, is billed and recognized as goods are delivered or services are performed. Contract training revenue results
from individual courses that are stand-alone courses and not part of a degree or certificate program. Bookstore sales are
primarily initiated by the student and are not included in the enrollment agreement at the onset of a student’s entrance
to the institution. Miscellaneous non-student related revenue consists of staffing services provided to third parties and
software license fees. These types of sales constitute a separate performance obligation from classroom instruction.

Our institutions’ academic year is generally at least 30 weeks in length but varies both by institution and
program of study and is divided by academic terms. Academic terms are determined by regulatory requirements
mandated by the federal government and/or applicable accrediting body, which also vary by university and
program. Academic terms are determined by start dates, which vary by university and program and are generally
8-12 weeks in length. Our non-degree professional development and continuing education offerings are generally
16-52 weeks in length.

Contract Assets

For each term, the portion of tuition and fee payments received from students but not yet earned is recorded

as deferred revenue and reported as a current liability on our consolidated balance sheets, as we expect to earn
these revenues within the next year. A contract asset is recorded for each student for the current term for which
they are enrolled for the amount charged for the current term that has not yet been received as payment and to
which we do not have the unconditional right to receive payment because the student has not reached the point in
the student’s current academic term at which the amount billed is no longer refundable to the student. On a
student by student basis, the contract asset is offset against the deferred revenue balance for the current term and
the net deferred revenue balance is reflected within current liabilities on our consolidated balance sheets. For
AIUS’ Trident and DigitalCrafts programs and CTU’s Hippo programs, students are billed as they enroll in
courses, including courses related to future periods. Any billings for future periods would meet the definition of a
contract asset as we do not have the unconditional right to receive payment as the course has not yet started.
Contract assets related to future periods are offset against the respective deferred revenue associated with the
future period.

100

Due to the short-term nature of our academic terms, the contract asset balance which exists at the beginning

of each quarter will no longer be a contract asset at the end of that quarter, with the exception of the contract
assets associated with future periods. The decrease in contract asset balances are a result of one of the following:
it becomes a student receivable balance once a student reaches the point in a student’s academic term where the
amount billed is no longer refundable to the student; a refund is made to withdrawn students for the portion
entitled to be refunded under each institutions’ refund policy; we receive funds to apply against the contract asset
balance; or a student makes a change to the number of classes they are enrolled in which may cause an
adjustment to their previously billed amount. As of the end of each quarter, a new contract asset is determined on
a student by student basis based on the most recently started term and a student’s progress within that term as
compared to the date at which the student is no longer entitled to a refund under each institution’s refund policy.
Contract assets associated with future periods remain as contract assets until the course begins and the student
reaches the point in that course that they are no longer entitled to a refund.

The amount of deferred revenue balances which are being offset with contract assets balances as of

December 31, 2021 and 2020 were as follows (dollars in thousands):

Gross deferred revenue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gross contract assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$113,719
(43,106)

$ 85,402
(50,868)

Deferred revenue, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 70,613

$ 34,534

As of December 31,

2021

2020

Deferred Revenue

Changes in our deferred revenue balances for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020 were as follows

(dollars in thousands):

Gross deferred revenue, January 1, 2021 . . . . . . . . .
Business acquisitions, beginning balance . . . . . . . .
Revenue earned from prior balances . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Billings during period (1)
Revenue earned for new billings during the

period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For the Year Ended December 31, 2021

CTU

AIUS

Total

$ 28,522
3,952
(27,857)
439,836

$ 56,880
1,404
(46,591)
271,053

$ 85,402
5,356
(74,448)
710,889

(378,926)
(853)

(235,041)
1,340

(613,967)
487

Gross deferred revenue, December 31, 2021 . . . . . .

$ 64,674

$ 49,045

$ 113,719

Gross deferred revenue, January 1, 2020 . . . . . . . . .
Business acquisition, beginning balance . . . . . . . . .
Revenue earned from prior balances . . . . . . . . . . . .
Billings during period (1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revenue earned for new billings during the

period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For the Year Ended December 31, 2020

CTU

AIUS

Total

$ 27,845
—
(25,179)
404,930

$ 35,359
13,395
(40,402)
289,751

$ 63,204
13,395
(65,581)
694,681

(378,161)
(913)

(240,836)
(387)

(618,997)
(1,300)

Gross deferred revenue, December 31, 2020 . . . . . .

$ 28,522

$ 56,880

$ 85,402

(1) Billings during period includes adjustments for prior billings.

101

Cash Receipts

Our students pay for their costs through a variety of funding sources, including federal loan and grant
programs, institutional payment plans, employer reimbursement, Veterans’ Administration and other military
funding and grants, private and institutional scholarships and cash payments, as well as private loans for our
non-degree programs. Cash receipts from government related sources are typically received during the current
academic term. We typically receive funds after the end of an academic term for students who receive employer
reimbursements. Students who have not applied for any type of financial aid generally set up a payment plan with
the university and make payments on a monthly basis per the terms of the payment plan.

If a student withdraws from one of our universities prior to the completion of the academic term, we refund

the portion of tuition and fees already paid that, pursuant to our refund policy and applicable federal and state law
and accrediting agency standards, we are not entitled to retain. Generally, the amount to be refunded to a student
is calculated based upon the percent of the term attended and the amount of tuition and fees paid by the student
as of their withdrawal date. In certain circumstances, we have recognized revenue for students who have
withdrawn that we are not entitled to retain. We have estimated a reserve for these limited circumstances based
on historical evidence in the amount of $2.1 million and $2.3 million as of December 31, 2021 and 2020,
respectively. Students are typically entitled to a partial refund until approximately halfway through their term.
Pursuant to each university’s policy, once a student reaches the point in the term where no refund is given, the
student would not have a refund due if withdrawing from the university subsequent to that date.

Management reassesses collectability when a student withdraws from the university and has unpaid tuition

charges for the current term which the university is entitled to retain per the applicable refund policy. Certain
unpaid charges do not meet the threshold of reasonably collectible and are recognized as revenue in accordance
with ASC Topic 606 when cash is received and the contract is terminated and neither party has further
performance obligations. We have no remaining performance obligations for students who have withdrawn from
our universities, and once the refund calculation is performed and funds are returned to the student, if applicable
under our refund policy, no further consideration is due back to the student. We recognized $1.6 million,
$1.1 million and $1.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, respectively, for payments
received from withdrawn students.

Significant Judgments

We analyze revenue recognition on a portfolio approach under ASC Topic 606. Significant judgment is used
in determining the appropriate portfolios to assess for meeting the criteria to recognize revenue under ASC Topic
606. We have determined that all of our students can be grouped into one portfolio. Based on our past
experience, students at different universities, in different programs or with different funding all behave similarly.
Enrollment agreements all contain similar terms, refund policies are similar across all institutions and students
work with the university to obtain some type of funding, for example, Title IV Program funds, Veterans
Administration funds, military funding, employer reimbursement or self-pay. We have significant historical data
for our students which allows us to analyze collectability. We do not expect that revenue earned for the portfolio
is significantly different as compared to revenue that would be earned if we were to assess each student contract
separately.

Significant judgment is also required to assess collectability, particularly as it relates to students seeking
funding under Title IV Programs. Because students are required to provide documentation, and in some cases
extensive documentation, to the Department to be eligible and approved for funding, the timeframe for this
process can sometimes span between 90 to 120 days. We monitor the progress of students through the eligibility
and approval process and assess collectability for the portfolio each reporting period to monitor that the
collectability threshold is met.

For the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, we received a majority of our universities’ cash
receipts for tuition payments from various government agencies as well as our corporate partnerships. These cash
receipts represent a substantial portion of our consolidated revenues and all have low risk of collectability.

102

7. STUDENT RECEIVABLES

Student receivables represent funds owed to us in exchange for the educational services provided to a
student. Student receivables are reflected net of an allowance for credit losses at the end of the reporting period.
Student receivables, net, are reflected on our consolidated balance sheets as components of both current and
non-current assets. We do not charge interest on any of our payment plans.

Our students pay for their costs through a variety of funding sources, including federal loan and grant
programs, institutional payment plans, employer reimbursement, Veterans’ Administration and other military
funding and grants, private and institutional scholarships and cash payments, as well as private loans for our
non-degree programs. Cash receipts from government related sources are typically received during the current
academic term. We typically receive funds after the end of an academic term for students who receive employer
reimbursements. Students who have not applied for any type of financial aid generally set up a payment plan with
the institution and make payments on a monthly basis per the terms of the payment plan. For those balances that
are not received during the academic term, the balance is typically due within the current academic year which is
approximately 30 weeks in length. Generally, a student receivable balance is written off once a student is out of
school and it reaches greater than 90 days past due.

Our standard student receivable allowance is based on an estimate of lifetime expected credit losses for
student receivables. Our estimation methodology considers a number of quantitative and qualitative factors that,
based on our collection experience, we believe have an impact on our repayment risk and ability to collect
student receivables. Changes in the trends in any of these factors may impact our estimate of the allowance for
credit losses. These factors include, but are not limited to: internal repayment history, changes in the current
economic, legislative or regulatory environments, internal cash collection forecasts and the ability to complete
the federal financial aid process with the student. These factors are monitored and assessed on a regular basis.
Overall, our allowance estimation process for student receivables is validated by trend analysis and comparing
estimated and actual performance.

We have an immaterial amount of student receivables that are due greater than 12 months from the date of

our consolidated balance sheets. As of December 31, 2021 and 2020, the amount of non-current student
receivables under payment plans that are longer than 12 months in duration, net of allowance for credit losses,
was $1.4 million and $1.3 million, respectively.

Allowance for Credit Losses

We define student receivables as a portfolio segment under ASC Topic 326 – Financial Instruments –

Credit Losses. Changes in our current and non-current allowance for credit losses related to our student
receivable portfolio in accordance with the guidance under ASU 2016-13 for the years ended December 31,
2021, 2020 and 2019 were as follows (dollars in thousands):

For the year ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

Balance, beginning of period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Provision for credit losses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amounts written-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recoveries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 42,147
44,349
(50,514)
3,273

$ 31,964
47,561
(40,053)
2,675

$ 24,836
43,470
(38,921)
2,579

Balance, end of period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 39,255

$ 42,147

$ 31,964

Fair Value Measurements

The carrying amount reported in our consolidated balance sheets for the current portion of student
receivables approximates fair value because of the nature of these financial instruments as they generally have

103

short maturity periods. It is not practicable to estimate the fair value of the non-current portion of student
receivables, since observable market data is not readily available, and no reasonable estimation methodology
exists.

8. PROPERTY AND EQUIPMENT

The cost basis and estimated useful lives of property and equipment as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 are

as follows (dollars in thousands):

December 31,

2021 (1)

2020 (1)

Life

Computer hardware and software . . .

$ 45,482

$ 40,587

Leasehold improvements . . . . . . . . . .
Furniture, fixtures and equipment
. . .
Building and improvements . . . . . . . .
Library materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construction in progress . . . . . . . . . .

Less-accumulated depreciation . . . . .

60,520
23,633
9,163
24
55
3,189

56,095
23,071
8,485
24
56
823

142,066
(113,711)

129,141
(101,380)

Total property and equipment, net . . .

$ 28,355

$ 27,761

3 years
Shorter of Life of Lease
or Useful Life
5-10 years
15-35 years
10 years
5 years

(1) Property and equipment which were fully depreciated and no longer in use by the Company were retired
during the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020; therefore, both the cost of the asset and the related
accumulated depreciation balances were reduced to zero for these assets.

Depreciation expense for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 was $12.3 million,

$12.0 million and $9.1 million, respectively.

9. LEASES

We lease most of our administrative and educational facilities under non-cancelable operating leases
expiring at various dates through 2032. Lease terms generally range from five to ten years with one to four
renewal options for extended terms. In most cases, we are required to make additional payments under facility
operating leases for taxes, insurance and other operating expenses incurred during the operating lease period,
which are typically variable in nature.

We determine if a contract contains a lease when the contract conveys the right to control the use of
identified property, plant or equipment for a period of time in exchange for consideration. Upon identification
and commencement of a lease, we establish a right of use (“ROU”) asset and a lease liability.

Contract components

A lease component is defined as an asset within the lease contract that a lessee can benefit from the use of

and is not highly dependent or interrelated with other assets in the arrangement. A lease contract may contain
multiple lease components. A non-lease component is defined as a component of the lease that transfers a good
or service for the underlying asset, such as maintenance services. We have determined that all of our leases
contain one lease component related to the building and land. We have determined that treating the land together
with the building as one lease component would not result in a significant difference from accounting for them as
separate lease components. Additionally, we have elected the practical expedient to include both the lease

104

component and the non-lease component as a single component when accounting for each lease and calculating
the resulting lease liability and ROU asset. Any remaining contract consideration, such as property taxes and
insurance, that does not meet the definition of a lease component or non-lease component would be allocated to
the single lease component based on our election.

Lease liability and ROU asset

The lease liability represents future lease payments for lease and non-lease components discounted for
present value. Lease payments that may be included in the lease liability include fixed payments, variable lease
payments that are based on an index or rate and payments for penalties for terminating the lease if the lessee is
reasonably certain to use a termination option, among others. Certain of our leases contain rent escalation clauses
that are specifically stated in the lease and these are included in the calculation of the lease liability. Variable
lease payments for lease and non-lease components which are not based on an index or rate are excluded from
the calculation of the lease liability and are recognized in the statements of income during the period incurred.

The ROU asset consists of the amount of the initial measurement of the lease liability and adjusted for any

lease incentives, including rent abatements and tenant improvement allowances, and any initial direct costs
incurred by the lessee. The ROU asset is amortized over the remaining lease term on a straight-line basis and
recorded within educational services and facilities expense on our consolidated statements of income.

Lease term

The lease term is determined by taking into account the initial period as stated in the lease contract and
adjusted for any renewal options that the company is reasonably certain to exercise as well as any period of time
that the lessee has control of the space before the stated initial term of the lease. If we determine that we are
reasonably certain to exercise a termination option, the lease term is then adjusted to account for the expected
termination date.

Quantitative lease information

Quantitative information related to leases for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 is

presented in the following table (dollars in thousands):

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

Lease expenses (1)

Fixed lease expenses - operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable lease expenses - operating . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sublease income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 11,442
3,173
(1,359)

$ 12,379
6,389
(2,347)

$ 12,869
8,534
(4,179)

Total lease expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 13,256

$ 16,421

$ 17,224

Other information

Gross operating cash flows for operating leases

(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating cash flows from subleases (2) . . . . . . . . .

$(18,390)
$ 1,430

$(23,577)
$ 2,254

$(32,827)
$ 4,351

105

As of December 31,
2021

As of December 31,
2020

As of December 31,
2019

Weighted average

remaining lease term
(in months) – operating
leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weighted average discount
rate – operating leases . .

69

4.9%

70

4.9%

76

5.1%

(1) Lease expense and sublease income represent the amount recorded within our consolidated statements of
income. Variable lease amounts represent expenses recognized as incurred which are not included in the
lease liability. Fixed lease expenses and sublease income are recorded on a straight-line basis over the lease
term and therefore are not necessarily representative of cash payments during the same period.

(2) Cash flows are presented on a consolidated basis and represent cash payments for fixed and variable lease

costs.

Gross Lease Obligations

As of December 31, 2021, future minimum lease payments under operating leases which are included in

lease liabilities on our consolidated balance sheet are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Operating Leases Total

2022 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2024 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2025 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2026 and thereafter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Less: imputed interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Present value of future minimum lease

payments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Less: current lease liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-current lease liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$11,504
8,444
7,580
7,374
17,890

$52,792

7,843

44,949

9,400

$35,549

(1) Amounts provided are for liabilities remaining as of December 31, 2021.

Subleases

Historically, for certain of our leased locations, we have vacated the facility and have fully or partially
subleased the space. For each sublease that has been entered into, we remain the guarantor under the lease and
therefore become the intermediate lessor. As of December 31, 2021, we have one sublease remaining with a term
ending May, 30, 2023. We recognize sublease income as on offset to lease expense on our consolidated
statements of income.

106

As of December 31, 2021, future minimum sublease rental income under operating leases, which will

decrease our future minimum lease payments presented above, as follows (dollars in thousands):

2022 (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2023 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 685
330

$1,015

Operating Subleases Total

(1) Sublease receivables remaining as of December 31, 2021.

Significant Judgments and Assumptions

We use discount rates to determine the net present value of our gross lease obligations when calculating the

lease liability and related ROU asset. In cases in which the rate implicit in the lease is readily determinable, we
use that discount rate for purposes of the net present value calculation. In most cases, our lease agreements do not
have a discount rate that is readily determinable and therefore we use an estimate of our incremental borrowing
rate. Our incremental borrowing rate is determined at lease commencement or lease modification and represents
the rate of interest we would have to pay to borrow on a collateralized basis over a similar term an amount equal
to the lease payments in a similar economic environment.

We have twelve leases related to our ongoing operations which consist of administrative offices and

university locations, and we are not reasonably certain that we will extend or terminate any of those leases.

10. GOODWILL AND OTHER INTANGIBLE ASSETS

The carrying values of goodwill were $162.6 million and $118.3 million as of December 31, 2021 and 2020,

respectively.

A reconciliation of the changes in the carrying value of goodwill during the years ended December 31, 2021

and 2020 is as follows (dollars in thousands):

CTU

2021

AIUS

As of December 31,

Total

CTU

2020

AIUS

Total

Balance, beginning of year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Business acquisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$45,938
27,790

$72,374
16,477

$118,312
44,267

$45,938
—

$41,418
30,956

$ 87,356
30,956

Balance, end of year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$73,728

$88,851

$162,579

$45,938

$72,374

$118,312

In assessing the fair value for CTU and AIUS, we performed a qualitative assessment as of October 1, 2021

to determine if we believe it is more likely than not that our reporting unit’s carrying values exceed their
respective fair values. When performing the qualitative assessment, management first considered events and
circumstances that may affect the fair value of the reporting unit to determine whether it is necessary to perform
the quantitative impairment test. Management focused on the significant inputs, including its projections of
revenue growth, operating expense leverage and the discount rate used in the prior year quantitative assessment,
and any events or circumstances that could affect the significant inputs. These events and circumstances
included, but were not limited to, financial performance, future expectations of financial performance, legal,
regulatory, contractual, competitive, economic, political, business or other factors, and industry and market
considerations, such as a deteriorating operating environment or increased competition. Management evaluated
all events and circumstances, including positive or mitigating factors, that could affect the significant inputs used
to determine fair value. Additionally, management evaluated its most recent quantitative assessment completed
during 2020 to determine by how much the previous fair value exceeded the carrying value for each indefinite-
lived intangible asset.

107

The determination of estimated fair value of each reporting unit requires significant estimates and

assumptions, and as such, these fair value measurements are categorized as Level 3 per ASC Topic 820. These
estimates and assumptions primarily include, but are not limited to, the discount rate, terminal growth rates,
operating cash flow projections and capital expenditure forecasts. Due to the inherent uncertainty involved in
deriving those estimates, actual results could differ from those estimates. We evaluate the merits of each
significant assumption used, both individually and in the aggregate, to assess the fair value of each reporting unit
for reasonableness.

As of December 31, 2021 and 2020, the net book value of intangible assets other than goodwill are as

follows (dollars in thousands):

December 31, 2021

December 31, 2020

Cost

Accumulated
Amortization

Net Book
Value

Cost

Accumulated
Amortization

Net Book
Value

Amortizable intangible assets:
Course curriculum (1)
Customer relationships (1) . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
Developed technology (1)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trade names (1)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 1,400
22,300
2,790
6,480

Net book value, amortizable intangible

$ (856)
(5,588)
(278)
(1,940)

$

544
16,712
2,512
4,540

$ 1,400
8,000
—
2,400

$ (389)
(2,222)
—
(1,567)

$ 1,011
5,778
—
833

assets:

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $32,970

$(8,662)

$24,308 $11,800

$(4,178)

$ 7,622

Non-amortizable intangible assets:

Accreditation rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CTU trade name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Non-amortizable intangible assets . . . . . . .

Intangible assets, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 1,000
6,900

7,900

$32,208

$ 1,000
6,900

7,900

$15,522

(1) See Note 3 “Business Acquisitions” for further details on acquired intangible assets.

Amortizable intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over their remaining estimated useful
lives, which range from one to ten years. Amortization expense from continuing operations was $4.5 million and
$2.8 million for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020, respectively. We did not have any amortization
expense for the year ended December 31, 2019.

As of December 31, 2021, net intangible assets include certain accreditation rights and trade names that are
considered to have indefinite useful lives and, in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 350—Intangibles—Goodwill
and Other, are not subject to amortization but rather reviewed for impairment on at least an annual basis by
applying a fair-value-based test.

We performed our annual impairment testing of other indefinite-lived intangible asset balances as of

October 1, 2021 utilizing the qualitative assessment approach and concluded that no indicators existed that would
suggest that it is more likely than not that the assets would be impaired. We monitor the operating results and
revenue projections related to our CTU trade name and accreditation rights on a quarterly basis for signs of
possible declines in estimated fair value. When performing the qualitative assessment, management considered
events and circumstances that may affect the fair value of the intangible assets to determine whether it is
necessary to perform the quantitative impairment test. These events and circumstances included, but were not
limited to, financial performance, future expectations of financial performance, legal, regulatory, contractual,
competitive, economic, political, business, and industry and market considerations. Management evaluated these
events and circumstances, including positive or mitigating factors, that could affect the significant inputs used to
determine fair value.

108

11. CREDIT AGREEMENT

On September 8, 2021, the Company and the subsidiary guarantors thereunder entered into a credit agreement
with Wintrust Bank N.A. (“Wintrust”), in its capacities as the sole lead arranger, sole bookrunner, administrative agent
and letter of credit issuer for the lenders from time to time parties thereto. The credit agreement provides the Company
with the benefit of a $125.0 million senior secured revolving credit facility. The $125.0 million revolving credit facility
under the credit agreement is scheduled to mature on September 8, 2024. So long as no default has occurred and other
conditions have been met, the Company may request an increase in the aggregate commitment in an amount not to
exceed $50.0 million. The loans and letter of credit obligations under the credit agreement are secured by substantially
all assets of the Company and the subsidiary guarantors. The credit agreement requires that interest is payable at the
end of each respective interest period or monthly in arrears, fees are payable quarterly in arrears and principal is
payable at maturity. Under the credit agreement, outstanding principal amounts bear annual interest at a fluctuating rate
equal to 1.0% less than the administrative agent’s prime commercial rate, subject to a 3.0% minimum rate. A higher
rate may apply to late payments or if any event of default exists.

We may prepay amounts outstanding under the credit agreement provided notice be received by Administrative
agent on the date of prepayment by early morning, in each case without premium or penalty, and terminate or reduce
the commitments provided notice received by Administrative agent five business days prior. The credit agreement and
the ancillary documents executed in connection therewith contain customary affirmative, negative and financial
maintenance covenants. The Company is required to maintain unrestricted cash, cash equivalents and short-term
investments in domestic accounts in an amount at least equal to the aggregate loan commitments then in effect.
Acquisitions to be undertaken by the Company must meet certain criteria, and the Company’s ability to make restricted
payments, including payments in connection with a repurchase of shares of our common stock, is subject to an
aggregate maximum of $100.0 million per fiscal year. Upon the occurrence of certain regulatory events or if the
Company’s unrestricted cash, cash equivalents and short term investments are less than 125% of the aggregate amount
of the loan commitments then in effect, the Company is required to maintain cash in a segregated, restricted account in
an amount not less than the aggregate loan commitments then in effect. The credit agreement also contains customary
representations and warranties, events of default, and rights and remedies upon the occurrence of any event of default
thereunder, including rights to accelerate the loans, terminate the commitments and realize upon the collateral securing
the obligations under the credit agreement.

This credit agreement with Wintrust replaced the previous $50.0 million revolving credit facility set forth in
the credit agreement dated as of December 27, 2018 with BMO Harris Bank N.A. As of December 31, 2021 and
2020, there were no outstanding borrowings under the current or prior revolving credit facility.

Selected details of our credit agreement as of and for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020 were as

follows (dollars in thousands):

As of December 31,

2021

2020

Credit Agreement:

Credit facility remaining availability . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outstanding letters of credit
Availability of additional letters of credit (1) . . . . . . . .
Weighted average daily revolving credit borrowings

for the year ended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weighted average annual interest rate . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commitment fee rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Letter of credit fee rate (2)

$124,082
918
$
$124,082

$48,582
$ 1,418
$23,582

$ —

$ —

0.00%
0.30%
3.00%

0.00%
0.30%
1.25%

(1) The letters of credit availability under the credit agreement with Wintrust is up to the borrowing limit of

$125.0 million. For the previous credit agreement with BMO Harris Bank N.A., a sublimit of $25.0 million
under the credit agreement was part of, not in addition to, the $50.0 million borrowing limit under the credit
agreement.

109

(2) The 2021 letter of credit fee rate is based on prime minus 1.0%, subject to a minimum rate of 3.0%. The

prime rate as of December 31, 2021 was 3.25%, which would yield a 2.25% fee rate, therefore the minimum
rate of 3.0% is reflected in the table above.

12. CONTINGENCIES

An accrual for estimated legal fees and settlements of $1.1 million and $1.0 million at December 31, 2021

and December 31, 2020, respectively, is presented within other current liabilities on our consolidated balance
sheets.

We record a liability when we believe that it is both probable that a loss will be incurred and the amount of

loss can be reasonably estimated. We evaluate, at least quarterly, developments in our legal matters that could
affect the amount of liability that was previously accrued and make adjustments as further information develops,
circumstances change or contingencies are resolved. Significant judgment is required to determine both
probability and the estimated amount. We may be unable to estimate a possible loss or range of possible loss due
to various reasons, including, among others: (1) if the damages sought are indeterminate; (2) if the proceedings
are in early stages; (3) if there is uncertainty as to the outcome of pending appeals, motions or settlements; (4) if
there are significant factual issues to be determined or resolved; and (5) if there are novel or unsettled legal
theories presented. In such instances, there is considerable uncertainty regarding the ultimate resolution of such
matters, including a possible eventual loss, if any.

We receive from time-to-time requests from state attorneys general, federal and state government agencies

and accreditors relating to our institutions, to specific complaints they have received from students or former
students or to student loan forgiveness claims which seek information about students, our programs, and other
matters relating to our activities. These requests can be broad and time consuming to respond to, and there is a
risk that they could expand and/or lead to a formal action or claims of non-compliance. We are subject to a
variety of other claims, lawsuits, arbitrations and investigations that arise from time to time out of the conduct of
our business, including, but not limited to, matters involving prospective students, students or former students,
alleged violations of the Telephone Consumer Protection Act, both individually and on behalf of a putative class,
and employment matters. Periodically matters arise that we consider outside the scope of ordinary routine
litigation incidental to our business. While we currently believe that these matters, individually or in aggregate,
will not have a material adverse impact on our financial position, cash flows or results of operations, these
matters are subject to inherent uncertainties, and management’s view of these matters may change in the future.
Were an unfavorable outcome to occur in any one or more of these matters, there exists the possibility of a
material adverse impact on our business, reputation, financial position and cash flows.

Contingent Consideration for Business Acquisitions

We recorded contingent consideration amounts for the DigitalCrafts and Hippo acquisitions in the aggregate

amount of $3.2 million during the year ended December 31, 2021. This aggregate amount was calculated based
upon third party valuation reports in conjunction with the purchase price allocations for these acquisitions.
Pursuant to the acquisition agreements, post-closing contingent consideration payments are expected to be paid
in early 2024 based upon the achievement of certain financial metrics, with an aggregate maximum amount of
$6.5 million.

13. INCOME TAXES

Pretax income from continuing operations for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 was

$149.1 million, $146.8 million and $93.0 million, respectively.

110

The provision for income taxes from continuing operations for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020

and 2019 consists of the following (dollars in thousands):

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

Current provision
Federal
State and local

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$19,143
4,956

$ —
2,110

$ —
754

Total current provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24,099

2,110

754

Deferred provision
Federal
State and local

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Total deferred provision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13,389
1,942

15,331

15,425
4,941

20,366

19,230
2,444

21,674

Total provision for income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$39,430

$22,476

$22,428

A reconciliation of the statutory U.S. federal income tax rate to our effective income tax rate for continuing

operations for the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 is as follows:

Statutory U.S. federal income tax rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State and local income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stock-based compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capital loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valuation allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State audit settlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tax credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Effective income tax rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For the Year Ended December 31,

2021

2020

2019

21.0%
2.6
1.0
(2.1)
2.1
—
(0.3)
2.1

26.4%

21.0% 21.0%
2.7
(0.3)
—
(10.9)
—
(0.1)
2.9

2.7
(1.3)
—
—
(0.5)
(0.1)
2.3

15.3% 24.1%

The effective tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2021 includes a $1.6 million unfavorable adjustment

associated with the tax effect of stock-based compensation, which increased the effective tax rate by 1.0%. The
2021 effective tax rate also reflects a $0.5 million favorable adjustment related to federal and state credits
claimed for the 2020 tax return and anticipated for the 2021 tax year, which decreased the effective tax rate by
0.3% and a $3.1 million favorable adjustment associated with a capital loss incurred for tax purposes on the
elimination of a wholly-owned subsidiary, which decreased the effective tax rate by 2.1%. Since utilization of the
capital loss is not anticipated, a valuation allowance of $3.1 million was established against the full amount of the
deferred tax balance for the capital loss carryforward, which increased the effective tax rate by 2.1%.

The effective tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2020 includes a $16.0 million favorable adjustment

related to the release of a valuation allowance maintained against the portion of the foreign tax credit
carryforward supported by an overall domestic loss (“ODL”) account balance, which decreased the effective tax
rate by 10.9%. The 2020 effective tax rate also reflects a $0.4 million favorable adjustment associated with the
tax effect of stock-based compensation, which decreased the effective tax rate by 0.3%.

The effective tax rate for the year ended December 31, 2019 includes a $1.2 million favorable adjustment

associated with the tax effect of stock-based compensation, which decreased the effective tax rate by 1.3% and a
$0.5 million net benefit associated with the results of a Florida income tax audit covering the years ended
December 31, 2014 through December 31, 2016, which decreased the effective tax rate by 0.5%. The 2019

111

effective tax rate also reflects the deductibility of $29.7 million of the FTC settlement, which is the amount paid
for the purpose of restitution.

A reconciliation of the beginning and ending amounts of gross unrecognized tax benefits as of

December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 is as follows (dollars in thousands):

Gross unrecognized tax benefits, beginning of the year
. .
Additions for tax positions of prior years . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additions for tax positions related to the current year . . . .
Reductions for tax positions of prior years . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reductions due to lapse of applicable statute of

2021

2020

2019

$11,794
941
4,250
—

$ 9,859

$ 9,009

—
2,954
(51)

—
1,957
(58)

limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(1,034)

(968)

(1,049)

Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interest and penalties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15,951
2,020

11,794
1,919

9,859
1,901

Total gross unrecognized tax benefits, end of the year . . .

$17,971

$13,713

$11,760

The total amount of net unrecognized tax benefits that, if recognized, would favorably affect the effective

tax rate in future periods was $14.2 million and $10.8 million for the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020,
respectively. As of December 31, 2021, our short and long-term reserves, recorded within current accrued
income taxes and other non-current liabilities, respectively, related to FASB’s interpretation No. 48 of ASC
Topic 740-10, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes or (“FIN 48”), were $1.2 million and $14.8 million,
respectively. We record interest and penalties related to unrecognized tax benefits within provision for income
taxes on our consolidated statements of income. The total amount of accrued interest and penalties resulting from
such unrecognized tax benefits was $2.0 million and $1.9 million as of the years ended December 31, 2021 and
2020, respectively. For the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, we recognized less than $0.1 million
of expense each year, related to interest and penalties from unrecognized tax benefits in our consolidated results
of continuing operations.

Perdoceo and its subsidiaries file income tax returns in the U.S. and in various state and local jurisdictions
and are routinely examined by tax authorities in these jurisdictions. As of December 31, 2021, Perdoceo had been
examined by the Internal Revenue Service through our tax year ending December 31, 2014. Due to the expiration
of various statutes of limitations, it is reasonably possible that Perdoceo’s gross unrecognized tax benefits
balance may change within the next twelve months by a range of zero to $1.6 million.

112

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities result primarily from temporary differences in the recognition of

various expenses for tax and financial statement purposes, and from the recognition of the tax benefits of net
operating loss and tax credit carry forwards. Components of deferred income tax assets and liabilities for
continuing operations as of December 31, 2021 and 2020 are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Deferred income tax assets:

Accrued occupancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foreign tax credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valuation allowance foreign tax credits . . . . . . . . . . .
Compensation and employee benefits . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tax net operating loss carry forwards . . . . . . . . . . . .
Valuation allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowance for doubtful accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accrued settlements and legal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accrued restructuring and severance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equity method for investments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General business tax credits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capital loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capital loss valuation allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amortization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

December 31,

2021

2020

$ 11,012
16,958
(16,958)
6,371
17,832
(12,090)
5,721
199
343
401
—
3,130
(3,130)
3,486
851
1,587

$ 13,028
27,321
(16,958)
7,054
19,183
(12,069)
5,363
203
353
406
1,620
—
—
5,656
—
1,388

Total deferred income tax assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35,713

52,548

Deferred income tax liabilities:

Depreciation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right of use asset, net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—
9,244
1,355

Total deferred income tax liabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10,599

111
10,611
1,475

12,197

Net deferred income tax assets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$ 25,114

$ 40,351

As of December 31, 2021, the Company has a gross deferred tax asset before valuation allowance of
$179.2 million and a gross deferred tax liability of $44.7 million. As of December 31, 2020, the Company had a
gross deferred tax asset before valuation allowance of $194.4 million and a gross deferred tax liability of
$51.5 million.

For the tax year ended December 31, 2021, we expect to fully utilize $10.2 million of foreign tax credit

carryforward and $1.8 million of general business tax credit carryforward to offset the federal tax liability that
would otherwise be due in 2021. As for the remaining $17.0 million of foreign tax credit carryforward, which
expires during 2022 and 2023 and is not supported by an ODL account balance, we continue to maintain a full
valuation allowance. During the year ended December 31, 2021, the Company incurred a capital loss for tax
purposes of $13.2 million on the elimination of a wholly-owned subsidiary. Given the absence of offsetting
capital gains, the capital loss has no impact on the federal and state tax liability for both the current and prior
years, and a valuation allowance has been established against the full amount of the deferred tax balance for the
capital loss carryforward. We have state net operating loss (“NOL”) carryforwards of approximately
$291.8 million, which expire between 2022 and 2037. Of this amount, approximately $180.5 million relates to
separate state NOL carryforwards and $16.0 million relates to combined state NOL carryforwards, which we
anticipate will not be used due to the teach-out of the schools in the applicable combined filing jurisdictions.

113

Valuation allowances have been established against the full amounts of the deferred tax balances for the separate
state NOL and the combined state NOL.

In assessing the continued need for a valuation allowance, we consider both positive and negative evidence

related to the likelihood of realization of the deferred tax assets. Topic 740 provides that important factors in
determining whether a deferred tax asset will be realized include whether sufficient taxable income is expected in
future years in order to use the deferred tax asset. In evaluating the realizability of deferred income tax assets, we
consider, among other things, historical levels of taxable income along with possible sources of future taxable
income, which include: the expected timing of the reversals of existing temporary reporting differences, the
existence of taxable income in prior carryback years, the expected impact of tax planning strategies that may be
implemented to prevent the potential loss of future income tax benefits and expected future taxable income.
Changes in, among other things, income tax legislation, statutory income tax rates, or future taxable income
levels could materially impact our valuation of income tax assets and liabilities and could cause our income tax
provision to vary significantly among financial reporting periods. If, based on the weight of available evidence, it
is more likely than not the deferred tax assets will not be realized, we record a valuation allowance, or release all
or a portion of the valuation allowance if it is more likely than not the deferred tax assets are expected to be
realized. The weight given to the positive and negative evidence is commensurate with the extent to which the
evidence may be objectively verified. A high degree of judgment is required to determine if, and the extent to
which, valuation allowances should be recorded against deferred tax assets.

As of December 31, 2020 and for the first three quarters of 2021, a valuation allowance of $29.0 million

was maintained with respect to our foreign tax credits and state net operating losses based on a consideration at
each period end of both positive and negative evidence related to the realization of the deferred tax assets. During
the quarter ended December 31, 2021, the Company incurred a $13.2 million capital loss for tax purposes on the
elimination of a wholly-owned subsidiary, which generated a deferred tax asset of $3.1 million. In assessing
whether the deferred tax asset on the capital loss was realizable, the Company considered the fact that capital
losses can only be utilized to offset capital gains and there were no available capital gains in the current year.
Furthermore, for federal tax purposes capital losses can generally only be carried back 3 years and carried
forward 5 years. Since there is no opportunity to carry back the capital loss and no material capital gains are
anticipated within the carry forward period, we determined a full valuation allowance was needed with respect to
the capital loss. As of December 31, 2021, the total valuation allowance attributable to our non-ODL supported
foreign tax credits, state net operating losses and capital loss carryforward is $32.2 million. The Company
concluded it was not more likely than not for the deferred tax assets related to the non-ODL supported foreign tax
credits to be realized and maintained the valuation allowance with respect to these assets. The separate state
NOLs can generally only be used by the originating entity and relate to entities that no longer maintain active
schools. Since these entities are not expected to generate future operating income, the more likely than not
threshold was not reached with respect to this portion of the deferred tax assets. Similarly, the Company
determined a valuation allowance was needed with respect to the portion of the combined state net operating
losses which will likely go unused due to the teach-out of the schools located in the applicable combined filing
jurisdictions. The amount of the deferred tax asset considered realizable, however, could be adjusted if estimates
of future taxable income during the carryforward period are increased or decreased, and additional weight may be
given to subjective evidence such as our projections for growth. We will continue to evaluate our valuation
allowance in future years for any change in circumstances that causes a change in judgment about the
realizability of the deferred tax asset.

14. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION

Overview of Share-Based Compensation Plans

The Perdoceo Education Corporation Amended and Restated 2016 Incentive Compensation Plan (“the

“2016 Plan”) became effective (as the Career Education Corporation 2016 Incentive Compensation Plan) on
May 24, 2016, and the amendment and restatement of the 2016 Plan became effective on June 3, 2021, upon its

114

approval by the Company’s stockholders. Under the 2016 Plan, Perdoceo may grant to eligible participants
awards of stock options, stock appreciation rights, restricted stock, restricted stock units, deferred stock,
performance units, annual incentive awards, and substitute awards, which generally may be settled in cash or
shares of our common stock. Any shares of our common stock that are subject to awards of stock options or stock
appreciation rights payable in shares will be counted as 1.0 share for each share issued for purposes of the
aggregate share limit and any shares of our common stock that are subject to any other form of award payable in
shares will be counted as 1.35 shares for each share issued for purposes of the aggregate share limit. As of
December 31, 2021, there were approximately 7.0 million shares of common stock available for future share-
based awards under the 2016 Plan, which is net of (i) 0.6 million shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding
options and (ii) 2.0 million shares underlying restricted stock units, which will be settled in shares of our
common stock if the vesting conditions are met and thus reduce the common stock available for future share-
based awards under the 2016 Plan by the amount vested. These shares have been multiplied by the applicable
factor under the 2016 Plan to determine the remaining shares available as of December 31, 2021. Additionally, as
of December 31, 2021 under the Company’s previous 2008 Incentive Compensation Plan, there were
approximately 0.4 million shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding options and 0.1 million shares underlying
outstanding deferred stock units, which will be settled in shares of our common stock if the vesting conditions
are met. The vesting of all types of awards is subject to possible acceleration in certain circumstances. If a plan
participant terminates employment for any reason other than by death or disability during the vesting period, the
right to unvested equity awards is generally forfeited.

As of December 31, 2021, we estimate that compensation expense of approximately $13.0 million will be
recognized over the next four years for all unvested share-based awards that have been granted to participants.
This amount excludes any estimates of forfeitures.

Stock Options. The exercise price of stock options granted under each of the plans is equal to the fair market

value of our common stock on the date of grant. Employee stock options generally become exercisable 25% per
year over a four-year service period beginning on the date of grant and expire ten years from the date of grant.
Non-employee directors’ stock options expire ten years from the date of grant and generally become 100%
exercisable after the first anniversary of the grant date. Grants of stock options are generally only subject to the
service conditions discussed previously.

115

Stock option activity during the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 under our plans was as

follows:

Options

Weighted Average
Exercise Price

Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Term

Aggregate
Intrinsic Value
(in thousands)

Outstanding as of December 31,

2018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,818,433
41,958
(258,621)
(8,017)
(156,144)

$ 9.59
21.29
5.76
15.39
22.99

Outstanding as of December 31,

2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,437,609

$ 9.32

Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—

(1,040,304)
(8,719)
(161,512)

—
5.18
11.79
30.25

Outstanding as of December 31,

2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,227,074

$10.07

Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exercised . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cancelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

—

(103,407)

—

(128,576)

—
5.31
—
22.01

Outstanding as of December 31,

2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

995,091

$ 9.02

Exercisable as of December 31,

2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

929,700

$ 8.68

$2,902

$7,615

$ 725

$3,823

$3,823

4.57

4.46

The following table summarizes information with respect to all outstanding and exercisable stock options

under all of our plans as of December 31, 2021:

Options Outstanding

Options Exercisable

Number of
Options
Outstanding

64,000
106,656
108,922
23,704
105,645
73,308
105,533
72,794
236,452
98,077

995,091

Weighted Average
Exercise Price

Weighted Average
Remaining
Contractual Term
(in Years)

$ 2.82
$ 3.93
$ 4.60
$ 5.90
$ 5.96
$ 6.60
$ 8.30
$ 9.94
$13.80
$17.91

$ 9.02

1.36
3.38
3.80
3.18
4.39
0.94
5.18
5.42
6.18
6.92

4.57

116

Number
Exercisable

64,000
106,656
108,922
23,704
105,645
73,308
105,533
72,794
171,061
98,077

929,700

Weighted
Average
Exercise Price

$ 2.82
$ 3.93
$ 4.60
$ 5.90
$ 5.96
$ 6.60
$ 8.30
$ 9.94
$13.80
$17.91

$ 8.68

Restricted Stock Units to be Settled in Stock. Restricted stock units to be settled in shares of stock which are

not “performance-based” generally vest 25% per year over a four-year service period. Restricted stock units
which are “performance-based” are subject to performance or market conditions that, even if the requisite service
period is met, may reduce the number of restricted stock units that vest at the end of the requisite service period
or result in all units being forfeited. The performance-based restricted stock units generally vest three years after
the grant date.

The following table summarizes information with respect to all outstanding restricted stock units to be

settled in shares of stock under our plans during the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019:

Restricted Stock to be
Settled in Shares of Stock

Outstanding as of December 31, 2018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Units

2,017,477
427,488
(500,818)
(22,955)

Outstanding as of December 31, 2019 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,921,192

Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

534,471
(242,515)
(67,098)

Weighted
Average
Grant-Date
Fair Value
Per Unit

$12.70
21.31
6.14
11.42

$16.34

15.45
11.02
17.18

Outstanding as of December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2,146,050

$16.70

Granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forfeited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

723,245
(1,329,017)
(77,085)

11.87
16.35
11.98

Outstanding as of December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1,463,193

$14.87

Deferred Stock Units to be Settled in Stock. Perdoceo granted deferred stock units to our non-employee

directors prior to 2017. The deferred stock units are to be settled in shares of stock. Settlement of the deferred
stock units and delivery of the underlying shares of stock to the plan participants does not occur until he or she
ceases to provide services to the Company in the capacity of a director, employee or consultant. As of
December 31, 2021, there are 73 thousand deferred stock units outstanding.

Stock-Based Compensation Expense. Total stock-based compensation expense for the years ended

December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 for all types of awards was as follows (dollars in thousands):

Award Type

2021

2020

2019

December 31,

Stock options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted stock units settled in stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restricted stock units settled in cash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$

464
14,495
—

$ 1,134
12,227
(240)

$ 1,690
7,569
2,301

Total stock-based compensation expense . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$14,959

$13,121

$11,560

Share-Based Awards Assumptions

We recognize the value of share-based compensation as expense in our consolidated statements of income

during the vesting periods of the underlying share-based awards using the straight-line method. FASB ASC

117

Topic 718 allows companies to estimate forfeitures of share-based awards at the time of grant and revise such
estimates in subsequent periods if actual forfeitures differ from original projections.

The fair value of stock option awards was estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes-Merton
option pricing model. During 2021, Perdoceo did not grant any stock options. Our determination of the fair value
of each stock option is affected by our stock price on the date of grant, as well as assumptions regarding a
number of highly complex and subjective variables. These variables include, but are not limited to, our expected
stock price volatility over the expected life of the awards and actual and projected stock option exercise behavior.
The weighted average fair value per share of stock option awards granted during the year ended December 31,
2019 and assumptions used to value stock options are as follows:

Dividend yield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Risk-free interest rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weighted average volatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expected life (in years) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weighted average grant date fair value per share of options

For the Year Ended
December 31,

2021 (1)

2020 (1)

2019

NA
NA
NA
NA

NA
NA
NA
NA

—
1.6%
62.6%
8.0

granted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NA

NA

$13.78

(1) There were no stock options awarded during the years ended December 31, 2021 and 2020.

Volatility is calculated based on the actual historical daily prices of our common stock over the same time

period as the expected term of the stock option award.

The expected life of each stock option award is estimated based primarily on our actual historical director

and employee exercise behavior and forfeiture rates.

The fair value of each share of restricted stock and restricted stock units to be settled in stock is equal to the

fair market value of our common stock as of the date of grant, which is the closing price per share of our
common stock on NASDAQ.

15. STOCK REPURCHASE PROGRAM

On November 4, 2019, the Board of Directors of the Company approved a stock repurchase program which

authorizes the Company to repurchase up to $50.0 million of the Company’s outstanding common stock. The
program replaced all prior stock repurchase programs authorized by the Board of Directors. The program’s
original expiration date was December 31, 2021. On October 19, 2021, the Board of Directors of the Company
extended the expiration date of the program to February 28, 2022.

The timing of purchases and the number of shares repurchased under the program will be determined by the
Company’s management and will depend on a variety of factors including stock price, trading volume and other
general market and economic conditions, its assessment of alternative uses of capital, regulatory requirements
and other factors. Repurchases will be made in open market transactions, including block purchases, conducted
in accordance with Rule 10b-18 under the Exchange Act as well as may be made pursuant to trading plans
established under Rule 10b5-1 under the Exchange Act, which would permit shares to be repurchased when the
Company might otherwise be precluded from doing so under insider trading laws. The stock repurchase program
does not obligate the Company to purchase shares and the Company may, in its discretion, begin, suspend or
terminate repurchases at any time, without any prior notice.

During the year ended December 31, 2021, we repurchased 2.3 million shares of our common stock for
approximately $25.3 million at an average price of $10.94 per share and during the year ended December 31,

118

2020, we repurchased 1.3 million shares of our common stock for approximately $17.9 million at an average
price of $13.53 per share. As of December 31, 2021, approximately $2.9 million was available under our
authorized stock repurchase program to repurchase outstanding shares of our common stock. Shares of stock
repurchased under the program are held as treasury shares. These repurchased shares have reduced the weighted
average number of shares of common stock outstanding for basic and diluted earnings per share calculations.

On January 27, 2022 the Board of Directors of the Company approved a new stock repurchase program for

up to $50.0 million which commences March 1, 2022 and expires September 30, 2023. The other terms of the
new stock repurchase program are consistent with the Company’s current stock repurchase program described
above which expires February 28, 2022.

16. WEIGHTED AVERAGE COMMON SHARES

Basic net income per share is calculated by dividing net income by the weighted average number of

common shares outstanding for the period. Diluted earnings per share is computed by dividing net income by the
weighted average number of shares assuming dilution. Dilutive common shares outstanding is computed using
the Treasury Stock Method and reflects the additional shares that would be outstanding if dilutive stock options
were exercised and restricted stock units were settled for common shares during the period.

The weighted average number of common shares used to compute basic and diluted net income per share for

the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019 were as follows:

For the Year Ended
December 31,

2021

2020

2019

Basic common shares outstanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common stock equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diluted common shares outstanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

70,024
857
70,881

69,414
1,851
71,265

70,088
1,997
72,085

For the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, certain unexercised stock option awards are
excluded from our computation of diluted earnings per share, as these shares were out-of-the-money and their
effect would have been anti-dilutive. The anti-dilutive options that were excluded from our computation of
diluted earnings per share were 0.4 million, 0.5 million and 0.7 million shares for the years ended December 31,
2021, 2020 and 2019, respectively.

In addition to the common stock issued upon the exercise of employee stock options and the vesting of
restricted stock units to be settled in stock, we issued less than 0.1 million shares for each of the years ended
December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, pursuant to our employee stock purchase plan.

17. EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLANS

Retirement Savings and Profit Sharing Plan

We maintain a defined contribution 401(k) retirement savings plan which is available to all employees who

have worked greater than 1,000 hours within a fiscal year. Under the plan, an eligible employee may elect to
defer receipt of a portion of their annual pay, including salary and bonus. During 2021, 2020 and 2019, we
contributed this amount to the plan on the employee’s behalf and also made a matching contribution equal to
50% of the first 2% and 25% of the next 4% of the percentage of annual pay that the employee elected to defer.
For employees hired on or after January 1, 2020, the participant is 100% vested in the company’s matching
contribution after two years of service. Employees hired before January 1, 2020 are fully vested in the company’s
matching contribution. During the years ended December 31, 2021, 2020 and 2019, we recorded expense under
this plan of approximately $3.0 million, $3.0 million, and $2.6 million, respectively.

119

Employee Stock Purchase Plan

We maintain an employee stock purchase plan that allows substantially all full-time and part-time

employees to acquire shares of our common stock through payroll deductions over three-month offering periods.
The per share purchase price is equal to 95% of the fair market value of a share of our common stock on the last
day of the offering period, and purchases are limited to 10% of an employee’s salary, up to a maximum of
$25,000 per calendar year. We are authorized to issue up to 4.0 million shares of common stock under the
employee stock purchase plan, and, as of December 31, 2021, 3.4 million shares of common stock have been
issued under the plan.

The compensation expense for employee share purchases recorded during the years ended December 31,
2021, 2020 and 2019 in connection with the compensatory elements of our employee stock purchase plan was
not significant.

18. SEGMENT REPORTING

Our segments are determined in accordance with FASB ASC Topic 280—Segment Reporting and are based
upon how the Company analyzes performance and makes decisions. Each segment is comprised of an accredited
postsecondary education institution that offers a variety of academic programs. These segments are organized by
key market segments and to enhance brand focus within each segment to more effectively execute our business
plan.

Our two reporting segments are described below.

• Colorado Technical University (CTU) is committed to providing quality and industry-relevant higher
education to a diverse student population through innovative technology and experienced faculty,
enabling the pursuit of personal and professional goals. CTU is focused on serving adult,
non-traditional students seeking career advancement, as well as addressing employer’s needs for a
well-educated workforce. CTU offers academic programs in the career-oriented disciplines of business
and management, nursing, healthcare management, computer science, engineering, information
systems and technology, project management, cybersecurity and criminal justice. Students pursue their
degrees through fully-online programs, local campuses and blended formats, which combine campus-
based and online education. As of December 31, 2021, students enrolled at CTU represented
approximately 61% of our total enrollments. Approximately 96% of CTU’s students are enrolled in
programs offered fully online. Through December 31, 2021 CTU’s campus-based and blended-format
students pursued their education solely through CTU’s online platform as a result of the COVID-19
pandemic.

• The American InterContinental University System (AIUS or AIU System) is comprised of two
universities: American InterContinental University (“AIU”) and Trident University International
(“Trident” or “TUI”). AIUS is committed to providing quality and accessible higher education
opportunities for a diverse student population, including adult and other non-traditional learners and the
military community. AIUS places emphasis on the educational, professional and personal growth of
each student. AIUS offers academic programs in the career-oriented disciplines of business studies,
information technologies, education, health sciences and criminal justice. Students pursue their degrees
through fully-online programs, local campuses and blended formats, which combine campus-based and
online education. As of December 31, 2021, students enrolled at AIUS represented approximately 39%
of our total enrollments. Approximately 97% of AIUS’ students are enrolled in programs offered fully
online. Throughout 2021, courses at AIUS’ ground-based campuses were gradually offered in-person,
with substantially all classes being offered in-person by December 31, 2021. Students are offered the
opportunity to return to campus-based instruction or remain virtual through synchronous virtual
instruction.

120

We evaluate segment performance based on operating results. Adjustments to reconcile segment results to
consolidated results are included under the caption “Corporate and Other,” which primarily includes unallocated
corporate activity and eliminations, as well as results related to our closed campuses.

Summary financial information by reporting segment is as follows (dollars in thousands):

Operating
Income
(Loss)

Depreciation
and
Amortization

Revenue

Capital

Expenditures Total Assets (1)

For the Year Ended December 31, 2021
CTU (2)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (4)

$408,549
283,360
1,125

$148,481
39,130
(38,595)

$ 7,365
9,068
333

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$693,034

$149,016

$16,766

For the Year Ended December 31, 2020
CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (4)

$405,507
281,361
446

$138,490
30,822
(26,378)

$ 6,165
8,301
320

$ 2,949
1,666
5,838

$10,453

$

110
1,224
8,434

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$687,314

$142,934

$14,786

$ 9,768

For the Year Ended December 31, 2019
CTU (5)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIUS (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corporate and Other (4) (7)

$392,263
235,374
67

$108,602
16,413
(38,553)

$ 5,397
3,388
360

$

580
411
4,183

Total

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

$627,704

$ 86,462

$ 9,145

$ 5,174

$153,072
151,407
542,954

$847,433

$ 96,922
141,602
482,993

$721,517

(1) Total assets are presented on a consolidated basis and do not include intercompany receivable or payable

activity between institutions and corporate and investments in subsidiaries.

(2) CTU results of operations and total assets include the Hippo acquisition commencing on the September 10,

2021 date of acquisition and as of December 31, 2021.

(3) AIUS results of operations and total assets include the DigitalCrafts acquisition commencing on the

August 2, 2021 date of acquisition and as of December 31, 2021 and the Trident acquisition commencing on
the March 2, 2020 date of acquisition and as of December 31, 2021 and 2020.

(4) Corporate and Other includes results of operations and total assets for closed campuses. Revenue recorded

within Corporate and Other relates to miscellaneous non-student related revenue.

(5) CTU results of operations include a $18.6 million charge related to the FTC settlement for the year ended

December 31, 2019.

(6) AIUS results of operations include a $11.4 million charge related to the FTC settlement for the year ended

December 31, 2019.

(7) Corporate and Other results of operations include a $7.1 million charge related to the Oregon arbitration

matter for closed campuses for the year ended December 31, 2019.

121

PERDOCEO EDUCATION CORPORATION AND SUBSIDIARIES

Schedule II

Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
(dollars in thousands)

Description

Valuation allowance for deferred tax assets (1):
For the year ended December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . .

Balance,
Beginning of
Period

Additions/
Charges
to Expense

Deductions/
Other

Balance,
End of
Period

$29,027

$ 3,151

$ —

$32,178

For the year ended December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . .

$44,999

$

68

$(16,040)

$29,027

For the year ended December 31, 2019 . . . . . . . . .

$48,037

$ —

$ (3,038)

$44,999

Valuation allowance for credit losses:
For the year ended December 31, 2021 . . . . . . . . .

$42,147

$44,349

$(47,241)

$39,255

For the year ended December 31, 2020 . . . . . . . . .

$31,964

$47,561

$(37,378)

$42,147

For the year ended December 31, 2019 . . . . . . . . .

$24,836

$43,470

$(36,342)

$31,964

(1) Amounts include both continuing and discontinued operations gross deferred tax balances.

122

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]

[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]